You can not select more than 25 topics
Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.
6886 lines
257 KiB
6886 lines
257 KiB
15 years ago
|
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
|
||
|
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//KDE//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2-Based Variant V1.0//EN" "dtd/kdex.dtd" [
|
||
|
<!ENTITY rosegarden "<application>Rosegarden</application>">
|
||
|
<!ENTITY MIDI "<acronym>MIDI</acronym>">
|
||
|
<!ENTITY % English "INCLUDE" > <!-- change language only here -->
|
||
|
<!ENTITY % addindex "IGNORE">
|
||
|
]>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- The language must be changed in the <book> tag for translations. -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
|
||
|
Notes on style and terminology for Rosegarden handbook
|
||
|
======================================================
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Try to use British spelling and idiom as much as you possibly
|
||
|
can, so the American bits don't stick out like a sore
|
||
|
thumb. Realise, not realize, colour, not color, though of
|
||
|
course an American is going to miss using colorful (oops)
|
||
|
British sayings like "a bit naff," and won't have any idea
|
||
|
what the bloody hell (that was good, but a bit too vulgar, of
|
||
|
course) words like "heuristic" mean.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Aim to be clear, brief and direct, but be informal.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Write instructions in the second person.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Good: "You can select segments by clicking on them with
|
||
|
the arrow tool."
|
||
|
|
||
|
Bad: "Segments can be selected by clicking on them with
|
||
|
the arrow tool."
|
||
|
|
||
|
Very bad: "The arrow tool allows the user to select segments
|
||
|
by clicking on them."
|
||
|
|
||
|
If you dislike the first of these because you want to make the
|
||
|
phrase "the arrow tool" more obvious by placing it at the
|
||
|
start of the sentence, then perhaps you should be using a
|
||
|
variablelist instead and making "the arrow tool" a list item.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* It's perfectly permissible to detour to explain why
|
||
|
something is the way it is, particularly if it might not be
|
||
|
obvious.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* It's also entirely permissible to omit advanced stuff. This
|
||
|
document is be about understanding how and why, not about
|
||
|
knowing every last clever detail. Initially we were going to
|
||
|
include a function reference section for the clever details,
|
||
|
but it proved too hard to keep up to date, and not all that
|
||
|
useful. Providing a quick bit of guidance is most of the job.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Bear in mind we can link extensively from any part of
|
||
|
the handbook to any other. Unfortunately DocBook won't allow
|
||
|
you to write a link to a target that doesn't exist yet, so if
|
||
|
you want to link to something that's not yet been written,
|
||
|
either make a note of the planned link in an XML comment, or
|
||
|
go and create a stub for the bit that hasn't been written yet,
|
||
|
or else just write in a way that allows for a link to be
|
||
|
easily added later (we could do an editing phase specially for
|
||
|
links).
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Be strict about using the correct terminology for
|
||
|
Rosegarden data structures (segment, event, track, instrument,
|
||
|
composition), but don't capitalise the words. Capitalisation
|
||
|
is useful in technical documents to make it clear that you're
|
||
|
referring to a precise concept, but you shouldn't have to do
|
||
|
it to make your meaning clear in user documentation. If
|
||
|
something seems ambiguous without, try rewording it instead.
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
About Screenshots
|
||
|
=================
|
||
|
|
||
|
We recommend saving your current user preferences as a new theme
|
||
|
using the KDE theme manager, so you can restore your usual
|
||
|
desktop after your work on this manual is done. Then we
|
||
|
recommend that you spare yourself some effort, and use the
|
||
|
"Rosegarden Handbook" KDE theme I just created, and put here:
|
||
|
|
||
|
http://rosegarden.sourceforge.net/Rosegarden\ Handbook.kth
|
||
|
|
||
|
If you can't use the theme for some reason, you must dial in
|
||
|
these changes by hand. Screenshots used with this documentation
|
||
|
should use the following style, colour and font settings:
|
||
|
|
||
|
(NOTE: These specs are from the KDE 2.x era, surely, and make no
|
||
|
particular mention of icon themes. I have no idea what icons
|
||
|
were used in the original version of this document, since it was
|
||
|
not specified. I have used the new default "Crystal SVG" icons
|
||
|
in creating the theme above. This will probably result in a
|
||
|
mis-match, but I find I really don't care.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
(NOTE in reply to the above: the scheme was originally from
|
||
|
KDE 2.x, yes. I suggest we don't worry about icon mismatches too
|
||
|
much, as most of the screenshots don't have icons in semantically
|
||
|
meaningful roles anyway. I use Crystal SVG too now and I don't
|
||
|
really intend to change that for the documentation.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
* KDE Style: "Light Style, 3rd Revision"
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Colour scheme: "Blue Slate", with high-contrast
|
||
|
setting and with the standard widget background set to white.
|
||
|
(I have this saved as a new scheme.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Fonts: Verdana 11px for general use and menus; Verdana
|
||
|
11px bold for window titles; antialiasing on, but sub-pixel
|
||
|
antialiasing off. (For pictures of the segment and instrument
|
||
|
parameter boxes I usually turn the size up to 13px, which
|
||
|
perhaps says something about our use of font size in these
|
||
|
boxes.) WARNING: This is not a reliable hint any more, as
|
||
|
the KDE font size is not in pixels but points that depend
|
||
|
on the detected monitor resolution. Go for something that
|
||
|
looks a bit like the existing screenshots; it will probably
|
||
|
be smaller than 11pt.
|
||
|
|
||
|
NOTE: switching off sub-pixel antialiasing is quite important,
|
||
|
as otherwise your text will look weird and fuzzy to any
|
||
|
readers with CRT monitors or LCDs with a different colour
|
||
|
ordering. The exact choice of font is less important: I
|
||
|
think you can get away with Vera or whatever.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Window Decorations: "Quartz"
|
||
|
|
||
|
None of these would be my first choice for nice-looking
|
||
|
screenshots now, but we're not here to sell Rosegarden in this
|
||
|
document, we're here to provide clear and consistent help text.
|
||
|
So the priority is to make new screenshots look like the existing
|
||
|
ones, not to make them look fancy. Also, I think there is an
|
||
|
advantage to having screenshots in a help document look a bit
|
||
|
distinct from the user's own window decorations surrounding the
|
||
|
help text.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Screenshots of the whole program or of whole matrix or notation
|
||
|
windows may be taken using different themes if desired, but
|
||
|
screenshots of individual dialogs or window components must use
|
||
|
the above scheme.
|
||
|
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
Notes on Usability Defects
|
||
|
==========================
|
||
|
|
||
|
This comment is a place to note anything I find difficult to
|
||
|
document, or anything where the functions for two necessarily
|
||
|
linked concepts are not actually linked in the GUI (etc).
|
||
|
|
||
|
* The audio file directory (in document properties) can't be
|
||
|
inspected or changed from the audio file manager. This is
|
||
|
arguably linked to a need for a project directory. There
|
||
|
are various other usability problems with the audio file
|
||
|
manager as well, e.g. there's no way to tell it to pull all
|
||
|
imported audio files into a single audio directory.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Track buttons showing sometimes-instrument, sometimes-label.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Mostly FIXED - Can't usefully double-click / right-click on
|
||
|
most rulers. This would be useful for a slower but clearer
|
||
|
way to set loops; adding and editing markers; etc. Setting
|
||
|
loops is particularly opaque especially in notation and
|
||
|
matrix views.
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Hideous inconsistency (documented in an RFE already) between
|
||
|
having to use RG for MIDI routing and being unable to use RG
|
||
|
for audio routing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Troubleshooting
|
||
|
===============
|
||
|
|
||
|
Shall we have a troubleshooting section?
|
||
|
|
||
|
* I'm not seeing any MIDI outputs
|
||
|
* I'm not hearing any sound from my MIDI outputs
|
||
|
* I'm not seeing any audio outputs
|
||
|
* I'm not hearing any sound from my audio outputs
|
||
|
* I don't see any synth plugins
|
||
|
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
Still to do (yeah right, in 30 to 75 years)
|
||
|
===========
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Control rulers
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Controller editing
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Event list
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Event editor dialogs
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Document properties
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Add images for the tools (move, split &c) when describing them
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Add images for transport buttons in transport section
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Update notation menu references
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Add new notation stuff <- "new" when this to-do item was added? when was that I wonder?
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Config dialog
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Make sure the guimenuitem etc tags are being used for all menu refs
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Give keyboard shortcuts for menu functions?
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Go through again changing Rosegarden -> &rosegarden; and double-hyphen ->
|
||
|
– or — and review any uses of "the ... function" to see
|
||
|
if these words are redundant
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Troubleshooter
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Check !!! items
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Fill gaps in revision history
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Consistent capitalisation: Instrument Parameter Box or instrument
|
||
|
parameter box? Audio Mixer or audio mixer? Device or device?
|
||
|
|
||
|
* Finally, review the structure again and adjust the <chapter>/<sect*>
|
||
|
for balance
|
||
|
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<book id="rosegarden" lang="&language;">
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- This header contains all of the meta-information for the document such
|
||
|
as Authors, publish date, the abstract, and Keywords -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<bookinfo>
|
||
|
<title>The Rosegarden Handbook</title>
|
||
|
<authorgroup>
|
||
|
<author>
|
||
|
<firstname>Chris</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>Cannam</surname>
|
||
|
</author>
|
||
|
<author>
|
||
|
<firstname>Richard</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>Bown</surname>
|
||
|
</author>
|
||
|
<author>
|
||
|
<firstname>Guillaume</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>Laurent</surname>
|
||
|
<firstname>D. Michael</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>McIntyre</surname>
|
||
|
<firstname>Pedro</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>Lopez-Cabanillas</surname>
|
||
|
<firstname>Heikki</firstname>
|
||
|
<surname>Junes</surname>
|
||
|
</author>
|
||
|
<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
|
||
|
</authorgroup>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<copyright>
|
||
|
<year>2002-2008</year>
|
||
|
<holder>Chris Cannam, Richard Bown, Guillaume Laurent, D. Michael
|
||
|
McIntyre, Pedro Lopez-Cabanillas, Heikki Junes</holder>
|
||
|
</copyright>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<date>2008-05-05</date>
|
||
|
<releaseinfo>1.7.0</releaseinfo>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<abstract>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-mainwindow.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
|
||
|
Rosegarden is an audio and &MIDI; sequencer and musical notation
|
||
|
editor. This Handbook describes how to use it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</abstract>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<keywordset>
|
||
|
<keyword>Rosegarden</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>sequencer</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>MIDI</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>audio</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>music</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>notation</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>score</keyword>
|
||
|
<keyword>KDE</keyword>
|
||
|
</keywordset>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</bookinfo>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- The contents of the documentation begins here. Label each
|
||
|
chapter so with the id attribute. This is necessary for two reasons:
|
||
|
it allows you to easily reference the chapter from other chapters of
|
||
|
your document, and if there is no ID, the name of the generated HTML
|
||
|
files will vary from time to time making it hard to manage for
|
||
|
maintainers and for the CVS system. Any chapter labelled (OPTIONAL)
|
||
|
may be left out at the author's discretion. Other chapters should
|
||
|
not be left out in order to maintain a consistent documentation
|
||
|
style across all KDE apps. -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="introduction">
|
||
|
<title>Introduction</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1>
|
||
|
<title>About Rosegarden</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<application>Rosegarden</application> is a &MIDI; and audio
|
||
|
sequencer and musical notation editor. Rosegarden allows you to
|
||
|
record, arrange, and compose music, in the shape of traditional
|
||
|
score or &MIDI; data, or of audio files either imported or
|
||
|
recorded from a microphone, guitar or whatever audio source you
|
||
|
care to specify. You can use Rosegarden to write, edit, and
|
||
|
organise music to create a composition, which you can then
|
||
|
synthesise, add effects to, and mix down for burning to CD or
|
||
|
distribution on the web. Rosegarden also contains well-rounded
|
||
|
notation editing support for high quality printed output.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<application>Rosegarden</application> is designed to look and
|
||
|
act in a manner familiar to experienced users coming to Linux
|
||
|
from other platforms, whilst also being accessible and friendly
|
||
|
to users new to music software generally.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="intro-handbook">
|
||
|
<title>About this Handbook</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This handbook summarises the capabilities of &rosegarden; and
|
||
|
provides a reference for some of the concepts involved. It's
|
||
|
designed to make sense either read in order or used as a reference
|
||
|
to the concepts and functions available in Rosegarden. If you
|
||
|
would like to read a tutorial as well, <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://rosegarden.sourceforge.net/tutorial/en/chapter-0.html">you
|
||
|
can find one here</ulink>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If there's something else that you
|
||
|
don't understand or require further help with, please visit
|
||
|
<ulink url="http://www.rosegardenmusic.com/support/">the
|
||
|
Rosegarden website</ulink> for Frequently Asked Questions and
|
||
|
mailing list instructions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="intro-menufunctions">
|
||
|
<title>About Menus and Shortcuts</title> <para>This handbook
|
||
|
usually refers to the functions you can use in Rosegarden by
|
||
|
describing where they live on the menus. For example, the
|
||
|
function to add a single new track to the main track editor is
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Tracks</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Add Track</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>In many cases, this is not the only way to reach a
|
||
|
particular function. In this case the same function is also
|
||
|
available through the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+T, and it also
|
||
|
appears as an icon on one of the main window's toolbars. Both
|
||
|
the keyboard shortcut and the icon can quickly be learned,
|
||
|
because they are shown on the menu in Rosegarden alongside the
|
||
|
name of the function. You should bear in mind that although we
|
||
|
always give the full menu location in this documentation for
|
||
|
reference purposes, it's not necessarily the best or most usual
|
||
|
way to use a function, and you should keep an eye on the
|
||
|
keyboard shortcuts or toolbar icons as well.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="intro-optional">
|
||
|
<title>Optional Features</title> <para>This Handbook assumes
|
||
|
that your Rosegarden installation supports all the features of
|
||
|
which it is capable. Some of Rosegarden's features, including
|
||
|
some very major ones, are actually optional when building a
|
||
|
Rosegarden installation, depending on which other libraries and
|
||
|
supporting code is available. For example, the whole audio
|
||
|
subsystem is only compiled in if JACK libraries are available;
|
||
|
synth plugin support depends on a number of other modules;
|
||
|
etc.</para> <para>These dependencies are documented in the
|
||
|
Rosegarden README and configuration documentation. If you find
|
||
|
that this Handbook refers to features not visible in the version
|
||
|
of Rosegarden you're using, consult your configuration
|
||
|
documentation or distributor.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
**********************************
|
||
|
|
||
|
PART I:
|
||
|
Discussion and tutorial material
|
||
|
|
||
|
**********************************
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="file-operations">
|
||
|
<title>Rosegarden Files and Documents</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; stores each composition in its own document, using
|
||
|
its own internal format. When you save a document it is stored
|
||
|
on disc as a file with the .rg extension.<footnote><para>
|
||
|
Many users have complained about our opaque binary file
|
||
|
format. It is, in fact, nothing more than gzipped XML.
|
||
|
</para></footnote> &rosegarden; can also
|
||
|
handle a number of other standard file formats.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-creating">
|
||
|
<title>New compositions</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
When &rosegarden; starts up, it does so with a new document,
|
||
|
containing an "empty" composition ready to start editing.
|
||
|
To put something in that composition, you must either record
|
||
|
something, or create some blank lengths of music (referred
|
||
|
to as "segments") that you can then fill in using the
|
||
|
various editing facilities.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>See <link linkend="recording">Recording</link> for details of how to record music, and see the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view">Track Editor</link> section for a
|
||
|
description of how to create, edit, and manage segments of
|
||
|
music.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-midi">
|
||
|
<title>Using MIDI files</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To import and export MIDI files, use the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import MIDI File</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
and
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export MIDI File</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
functions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Although &rosegarden; can load and save file formats such as
|
||
|
MIDI, it does not store MIDI data internally. You should
|
||
|
generally prefer to save files in &rosegarden;'s own format,
|
||
|
as &rosegarden; stores quite a lot of information that will
|
||
|
be lost when exporting to MIDI. This also applies if you merely
|
||
|
import a file, and then immediately export it back out. &rosegarden;
|
||
|
translates the raw MIDI to its internal format, and then translates that format
|
||
|
back into MIDI. Some details of the file structure can and do get
|
||
|
lost or rearranged in this translation, but the resulting performances
|
||
|
should be functionally identical.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
When a MIDI file is loaded, &rosegarden; splits out the
|
||
|
music into one track per MIDI track or channel in the file,
|
||
|
<link linkend="studio-midi-import">sets up the appropriate
|
||
|
instrument mappings</link>, and <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-quantization">attempts to calculate plausible
|
||
|
notation</link> for the MIDI performance data.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-rgproject">
|
||
|
<title>Rosegarden Project files</title> <para>A Rosegarden
|
||
|
composition file (.rg) contains all of the the note information
|
||
|
for your composition, as well as other data such as MIDI
|
||
|
controller settings, plugin details, and the names of any audio
|
||
|
files referred to in your composition. The audio files
|
||
|
themselves are not stored in the Rosegarden composition file;
|
||
|
instead you are expected to keep track of their location on disk
|
||
|
yourself (see <link linkend="segment-view-audio-segments">Audio
|
||
|
segments</link>). When you need to transfer a project from one
|
||
|
computer to another, or to a friend or colleague, this can be
|
||
|
inconvenient. This is where Rosegarden Project files are
|
||
|
useful. A Project file contains your composition, all of the
|
||
|
audio files it uses, any further data files required for plugins
|
||
|
used in the composition, and any additional files you may want
|
||
|
to include, all in one big bundle.</para>
|
||
|
<para>Use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export Rosegarden Project file...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to export the current composition and its associated data into a Rosegarden Project file, and <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import Rosegarden Project file...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to expand a Rosegarden Project file back into a composition and load it.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that Rosegarden Project format is an interchange
|
||
|
format, not an archival format. Although Rosegarden composition
|
||
|
files are very carefully checked for compatibility from one
|
||
|
Rosegarden version to the next, no long-term guarantees are made for the
|
||
|
Project file format.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-other">
|
||
|
<title>Other file formats</title>
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden can export to and import from a number of other file formats. Some of these are described here; see also <link linkend="file-printing">Printing</link> for information about LilyPond file export.</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Csound</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>You can export score files for the Csound synthesis system using
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export Csound score file...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>. Together with a suitable orchestra file (not supplied), this can be used to play the composition through <ulink url="http://www.csounds.com/">Csound</ulink>. Note that not all data in the Rosegarden composition necessarily can or will be saved in the Csound format.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Mup</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>You can use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export Mup file...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
to save the contents of the current composition into a new Mup file. This can then be processed by the <ulink url="http://www.arkkra.com/">Mup</ulink> music publication system, although it is likely that the file may need some tweaking to get really good quality output. Note that not all data in the Rosegarden composition necessarily can or will be saved in the Mup format.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>MusicXML</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export MusicXML file...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function saves the contents of the current composition into a new MusicXML file. This can then be used with any music software that supports the MusicXML format. Note that MusicXML support is experimental and has not been well tested. Not all data in the Rosegarden composition necessarily can or will be saved in the MusicXML format.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Hydrogen</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden can import h2song files created by the Hydrogen drum machine. These are imported into a skeletal MIDI-style structure with one track per pattern. The audio samples they use are not imported. Use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import Hydrogen file...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> to import a Hydrogen file.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Rosegarden 2.1</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Use the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Import Rosegarden 2.1 file...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function to create a new composition from the contents of an existing X11 Rosegarden v2.1 (.rose) file.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-merge">
|
||
|
<title>Merging files</title> <para>As well as loading or
|
||
|
importing files, you can also merge them into the current
|
||
|
document, loading or importing the data from the file, as necessary,
|
||
|
and adding it to the existing composition.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To merge a file, just use the relevant option on the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Merge</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
submenu, instead of using the Open or
|
||
|
Import option.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="file-printing">
|
||
|
<title>Printing</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can print out a composition in the form of a musical
|
||
|
score, using the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function or the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Print with LilyPond</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Producing a score from performance data is a hard task, and
|
||
|
in most cases it's unreasonable to expect a default printout
|
||
|
based on MIDI data to be very readable. You should use the
|
||
|
<link linkend="notation-view">notation editor</link> to tidy
|
||
|
up the score before printing. (See also <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-quantization">Notation from performance
|
||
|
data</link>.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; is capable of producing very readable scores. Even
|
||
|
so, it is designed to be a screen editor and not primarily a
|
||
|
typesetter. If you want to produce true print-quality scores you
|
||
|
should consider using <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://www.lilypond.org">LilyPond</ulink> in conjunction
|
||
|
with &rosegarden;. LilyPond is music typesetting software that
|
||
|
reads a specialised text file format and produces high-quality
|
||
|
typeset output. &rosegarden; is capable of writing LilyPond files
|
||
|
using the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export LilyPond</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function, and it
|
||
|
features special <link linkend="nv-lilypond-directives">exportable
|
||
|
directives</link> and <link linkend="track-parameters">track
|
||
|
parameters</link> that provide access to LilyPond features for
|
||
|
which there is currently no parallel within &rosegarden;'s own
|
||
|
native interface.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>LilyPond may be conveniently used with the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Preview with LilyPond</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function, which exports the file into a temporary file and processes
|
||
|
it directly with LilyPond for preview with a PDF viewer.
|
||
|
If you are happy with the preview, you may print the score using the
|
||
|
printing capability of the PDF viewer, or use the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Print with LilyPond</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
When Export, Preview, or Printing is done with LilyPond,
|
||
|
there is available also a collection of
|
||
|
<link linkend="lilypond-options">LilyPond options</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="lilypond-options">
|
||
|
<title>LilyPond options</title>
|
||
|
<para>If one of the LilyPond export functions is invoked, there will
|
||
|
appear a dialog in which options specific to LilyPond export may be
|
||
|
altered.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>LilyPond version</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
LilyPond version installed into the system should be automatically
|
||
|
detected in the dialog, but it is possible to export to any other
|
||
|
LilyPond version since 2.6. Historically, LilyPond's syntax has
|
||
|
changed somewhat over time, but since LilyPond version 2.6 changes
|
||
|
have have been less radical and more maintainable.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Paper size and Landscape</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Paper size can be A3, A4, A5, A6, Legal, US Letter, and Tabloid.
|
||
|
All paper sizes may also be used in Landscape mode.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Font size</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Font size affects the size of the notes. If you want to fit more
|
||
|
staffs into the paper, you should decrease the font size.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Export content</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Export content concerns tracks that have segments in them, which
|
||
|
are the tracks that are not empty.
|
||
|
It is possible to export All tracks, Non-muted tracks, the current
|
||
|
Selected track, or Selected segments. If LilyPond export is
|
||
|
launched from the Notation view, Selected segments include
|
||
|
the same selection which was used in opening the Notation view.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Merge tracks that have the same name</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
It is possible to Merge tracks that have the same name.
|
||
|
This options allows for example to make a piano score with
|
||
|
several independent voices. You may give first three tracks
|
||
|
name "Right" and three next tracks "Left" and then merge
|
||
|
them in LilyPond export. (This provides an easier way to manage
|
||
|
overlapping segments with the price that the top and bottom
|
||
|
parts will have different names on the page. If you wish both
|
||
|
of them to be named, eg. "Piano," then you will have to keep all
|
||
|
of the segments on the same pair of staffs. Consult <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://rosegarden.sourceforge.net/tutorial/supplemental/piano/">Piano
|
||
|
by Example</ulink> for a hands-on demonstration of this.) <!--
|
||
|
this comment makes absolutely no sense to me(dmm): Sometimes you
|
||
|
may encounter notes that overlap in printed form, you may avoid
|
||
|
them by selecting one of the collapsing notes and fine adjust
|
||
|
its position in Notation view function -->
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Fine Positioning</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Push Right/Left</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Export tempo marks</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Tempo marks are not exported by default. If tempo changes
|
||
|
rarely, you may want to export all tempo marks, but if
|
||
|
tempo changes too often, you may export only the first mark.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Export lyrics</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-text-lyrics">Lyrics</link> is exported if this
|
||
|
option is checked. Text is entered in Unicode, which
|
||
|
makes it possible to enter lyrics in all languages. Multiple
|
||
|
lines of lyrics per staff is also possible, see the section
|
||
|
on <link linkend="nv-text-lyrics">Editing lyrics</link>.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Export beamings</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-beamed-groups">Beams</link> defined in
|
||
|
&rosegarden; can be exported, or the default
|
||
|
beam grouping of LilyPond can be used. Future versions
|
||
|
of &rosegarden; may support nested note grouping.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<!-- deprecated
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Add staff group bracket</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Staff group bracket may be added to cover all staffs.
|
||
|
Future versions of &rosegarden; may support nested staff
|
||
|
groupings.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry> -->
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Lyrics alignment</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Lyrics is aligned Left by default. Sometimes Center or
|
||
|
Right alignment provides results and more pleasant output.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Ragged bottom</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
The staffs normally cover the whole page from top to bottom.
|
||
|
When there are only a few staffs, this option places the
|
||
|
extra vertical space at the bottom of the page instead.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry> <varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Enable "point-and-click" debugging</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
If you export the LilyPond source with the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export LilyPond</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function, you may open the LilyPond source by clicking
|
||
|
notes in the PDF output. Consult <ulink url=" http://lilypond.org/doc/v2.10/Documentation/user/lilypond/Point-and-click#Point-and-click">LilyPond documentation</ulink> for more
|
||
|
information.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry> <varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Export \midi block</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
LilyPond is also capable of producing MIDI output. Check this
|
||
|
option if you wish the LilyPond source to use this option.
|
||
|
Note however that MIDI output which you obtain via &rosegarden;
|
||
|
sequencer, via
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export MIDI file</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>,
|
||
|
and via LilyPond's MIDI output may differ considerably.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry> <varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Headers</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
Headers can be edited both in LilyPond export dialog and through the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Edit Document Properties</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function.</para><para>Some of the headers will appear
|
||
|
only in LilyPond output.
|
||
|
The position of the Printable headers match roughly with
|
||
|
the positions of the headers in the printed output.
|
||
|
Below is shown an example with all headers and lyrics
|
||
|
entered with Unicode text.</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="headers-and-unicode-lyrics.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>LilyPond's output showing all headers and Unicode lyrics.</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="segment-view">
|
||
|
<title>The Track Editor</title>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-overview">
|
||
|
<title>Overview</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden;'s main layout is similar to many
|
||
|
other popular sequencers. It is based on a track
|
||
|
structure — the main window shows a track editor with
|
||
|
a list of tracks and their associated instruments down the
|
||
|
left hand side. You can manipulate and move blocks of
|
||
|
music data (referred to as “segments”) on the
|
||
|
track editor as well as opening the segments themselves in
|
||
|
specialised editors (<link
|
||
|
linkend="notation-view">notation</link>, <link
|
||
|
linkend="matrix-view">matrix</link>, <link
|
||
|
linkend="percussion-matrix-view">percussion matrix</link>, and <link
|
||
|
linkend="event-view">event list</link>).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackeditor.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Track Editor showing two segments of music data</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Tracks govern what sort of segment you can create in a particular
|
||
|
place. If you create a segment on an audio track, it will be an audio
|
||
|
segment, no matter where that segment subsequently moves. If you
|
||
|
create a segment on a &MIDI; track, it will always be a &MIDI;
|
||
|
segment. You can set <link linkend="track-parameters">
|
||
|
track parameters</link> to pre-select various segment properties at the track
|
||
|
level, and to exercise fine control over &MIDI; recording.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Tracks can be assigned to a range of &MIDI;, plugin synth, or
|
||
|
audio instruments. In the picture above we see three segments
|
||
|
in the track editor on tracks assigned to General MIDI
|
||
|
instruments.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackbutton-labels.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Track buttons showing track labels</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The button area to the left of the segment canvas shows you
|
||
|
the track number, mute and record status, and the label of the
|
||
|
track. You can mute or unmute a track by clicking on the blue
|
||
|
LED-style button, and select a particular track as a record
|
||
|
target by clicking on the red one. To change the track label,
|
||
|
double-click on it.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackbutton-instruments.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Track buttons showing instrument assignments</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Track labels are only shown if the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Track Labels</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
menu option is enabled.
|
||
|
Otherwise, as in this picture, the instrument assignments for
|
||
|
the tracks are shown instead.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-instruments">
|
||
|
<title>Tracks and instruments</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Each track must have an instrument assigned to it, in order to
|
||
|
be heard. By default the first 16 tracks are assigned to the
|
||
|
16 instruments of the first available MIDI device, and the
|
||
|
next 16 tracks are assigned to audio.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To change the instrument assignment for a track,
|
||
|
right-click on the track label: a pop-up menu will appear from
|
||
|
which you can select among all the available instruments.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackbutton-instrumentmenu.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Instrument menu</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
An instrument can be understood as a single channel on a
|
||
|
&MIDI; device, or as a mono or stereo audio output or an audio
|
||
|
synth plugin. Tracks containing note data should be assigned
|
||
|
to &MIDI; or synth plugin instruments, and those containing
|
||
|
audio to audio instruments. You can assign more than one
|
||
|
track to the same instrument, in which case the multiple
|
||
|
tracks will produce sounds in the same way (&MIDI; tracks playing
|
||
|
panned to the left with a flute, or audio tracks playing with the same
|
||
|
volume levels, through the same stack of <link linkend="studio-plugins">
|
||
|
plugins</link>.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can change various properties of the instrument
|
||
|
associated with a track using the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">Instrument
|
||
|
Parameter Box</link>. This is where, for example, you would
|
||
|
set a MIDI instrument to use a particular patch and so
|
||
|
produce a particular sound (piano, strings etc).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
See the
|
||
|
<link linkend="studio-introduction">Studio</link> section
|
||
|
for more about instruments.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-creating">
|
||
|
<title>Creating segments</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To create an empty segment, in order to begin composing
|
||
|
something new, you need to use the pencil tool (which is normally the
|
||
|
default active tool when you first start &rosegarden;). Click on
|
||
|
the pencil on the toolbar, and then click at the point where
|
||
|
you want the segment to start (at the correct height for the
|
||
|
track you want the segment to be on, and at a distance
|
||
|
across the editor window corresponding to the correct time)
|
||
|
and drag rightwards until the segment is the right number of
|
||
|
bars long.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also create segments using the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-selector">Select tool</link>, by clicking
|
||
|
and dragging either with the middle mouse button, or with the
|
||
|
left button and Ctrl held down.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you want to draw a segment longer than the visible
|
||
|
portion of the canvas, the canvas will scroll automatically once you
|
||
|
reach its edge. If you keep dragging past the end of the entire
|
||
|
composition, you can keep dragging, and will push the end marker right along
|
||
|
with you. (This is a welcome contrast to earlier versions of
|
||
|
&rosegarden;.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Usually each new segment starts on a barline and extends bar
|
||
|
by bar, but this snap-to-grid effect can be prevented by
|
||
|
holding down Shift while clicking and dragging.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>New segments are created in a yellow colour, with a treble clef by
|
||
|
default. You may wish to jump ahead and have a look at <link
|
||
|
linkend="track-parameters">track parameters</link> to explore
|
||
|
other possibilities.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you wish to draw a segment that begins in the middle of an
|
||
|
existing segment, hold Ctrl and Alt when clicking. The track will
|
||
|
automatically expand to accommodate this new segment. This is especially
|
||
|
useful for some situations involving music notation.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Once you have created a segment, you can then begin editing
|
||
|
using the <link linkend="matrix-view">matrix</link>, <link linkend="percussion-matrix-view">percussion matrix</link> or <link
|
||
|
linkend="notation-view">notation</link> editors. To use one
|
||
|
of these editors, either double-click on the segment, or
|
||
|
else click with the right mouse button and choose the editor
|
||
|
you want from the context menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you are intending to <link
|
||
|
linkend="recording">record</link> from a MIDI device or audio
|
||
|
input, you don't need to create a new segment to record into
|
||
|
first -- each separate recording always goes into a new
|
||
|
segment, created automatically during recording.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-audio-segments">
|
||
|
<title>Audio segments</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
An audio segment contains recorded or sampled audio data,
|
||
|
instead of editable note-event data. Rosegarden allows you to
|
||
|
record, play, arrange and split audio segments, but does not
|
||
|
contain audio waveform editing facilities.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>To create an audio segment, you can <link
|
||
|
linkend="recording">record</link> from an audio source onto a
|
||
|
track assigned to an audio instrument, or you can work with
|
||
|
existing WAV files. To do this, you need to use the audio
|
||
|
manager dialog (reached via <menuchoice><guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Audio Files</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-audiofilemanager.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The audio file manager</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can drag-and-drop audio files from the KDE file
|
||
|
browser or your KDE desktop into the audio file manager, or you
|
||
|
can open them using its File menu. Then you can either
|
||
|
drag-and-drop them onto Rosegarden's track canvas, or use the
|
||
|
audio file manager's <menuchoice><guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Action</guimenu><guimenuitem>Insert into Selected
|
||
|
Audio Track</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu function, provided the current
|
||
|
selected track in the main window is assigned to an audio
|
||
|
instrument. Newly-recorded audio segments also appear in the
|
||
|
audio file manager dialog.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Details of the audio files associated with a particular
|
||
|
composition are saved with that composition, but the audio files
|
||
|
themselves are not. You should ensure your document has a
|
||
|
sensible audio file search path (via <menuchoice><guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Composition</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit Document
|
||
|
Properties...</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Audio</guimenuitem></menuchoice>)
|
||
|
so as to keep your audio files accessible together. You can also export
|
||
|
your project to a &rosegarden; project package file (.rgp) via
|
||
|
<menuchoice><guimenu lang="en">File</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Export Rosegarden Project File
|
||
|
</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to collect any scattered audio files
|
||
|
together in one place.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The audio manager dialog also shows the sample-rate and
|
||
|
other information for each audio file, and marks with an
|
||
|
asterisk any audio file whose sample rate does not match that of
|
||
|
the current JACK audio session that Rosegarden is using.
|
||
|
Rosegarden will resample these files at playback time using a
|
||
|
very low quality zero order hold resampler. You are advised to
|
||
|
resample them separately using a separate dedicated audio editor
|
||
|
instead.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-manipulating">
|
||
|
<title>Manipulating segments</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The main window contains a selection of "tools" for editing
|
||
|
segments. These are available from the main toolbar: first
|
||
|
select the tool you want from the toolbar, and then click
|
||
|
and drag on the segments on the main canvas.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-selector">
|
||
|
<title>The Select tool</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The select tool <inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-select.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
is actually a
|
||
|
multipurpose tool: it can be used to select, move, copy,
|
||
|
resize and create segments.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The most obvious use is
|
||
|
selection: select a single segment by clicking on it with
|
||
|
the select tool, or select several by clicking with Shift
|
||
|
held down, or by clicking in an empty area of the window and
|
||
|
dragging out an area.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To move segments with the select tool, simply click and
|
||
|
drag on the segment. To create copies, click and drag with
|
||
|
Ctrl held down. To resize a segment, click and drag on the
|
||
|
right-hand edge of the segment. To create new segments, click
|
||
|
and drag on an empty area either with the middle mouse button
|
||
|
or with the left mouse button and Ctrl held down.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The select tool doesn't replace the other tools completely,
|
||
|
though — sometimes you need to be more precise about
|
||
|
which operation you intend, particularly when working on small
|
||
|
segments.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-move-resize">
|
||
|
<title>Move and Resize tools</title>
|
||
|
<para>To move a segment to a different start time or track,
|
||
|
use the move tool <inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-move.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
and click and drag on the segment you want
|
||
|
to move. If you hold down the Ctrl key while dragging, the
|
||
|
segment will be copied instead of moved.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To resize a segment, use the resize tool <inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-resize.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
and click and drag on the right-hand end of the segment.
|
||
|
Resizing a segment has the effect of extending or
|
||
|
shortening it, by subtracting some of its contents or adding
|
||
|
silence at the start or end. If you hold down the Ctrl
|
||
|
key, the segment will be <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-rescale">rescaled</link> (stretched
|
||
|
or squashed) instead of extended or shortened.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For both move and resize you can hold Shift for fine
|
||
|
positioning, to avoid snapping to a particular grid position.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-rescale">
|
||
|
<title>Stretching and squashing segments</title>
|
||
|
<para>Resizing a segment normally makes it shorter or longer
|
||
|
by subtracting content or adding some extra space. However,
|
||
|
by holding the Ctrl key while resizing, you can instead
|
||
|
stretch or squash the contents of the segment. You can also do this by selecting the segment and then using <menuchoice><guimenu lang="en">Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Stretch or Squash...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For segments that contain MIDI events, this re-spaces the
|
||
|
events so that they are spread across the new segment's
|
||
|
duration, playing back faster or slower than before but in
|
||
|
the same relative proportions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For audio segments, this time-stretches the audio, altering
|
||
|
its played speed without altering its pitch (as would happen
|
||
|
if the audio was simply played back faster or slower).
|
||
|
Time-stretching usually adds some audible artifacts as well,
|
||
|
so the quality of your results may vary.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; does not alter the original audio file when
|
||
|
time-stretching an audio segment, and if you rescale the same
|
||
|
segment repeatedly it will always work from the original
|
||
|
file instead of accumulating timestretching artifacts with
|
||
|
each rescale. You can rescale both mono and stereo audio.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
(For reference, &rosegarden; uses a frequency-domain
|
||
|
time-stretcher based on a phase vocoder with phase-locking
|
||
|
at percussive transients. This usually produces good
|
||
|
results with stable harmonic sounds such as pads and basses
|
||
|
as well as purely percussive sounds such as drum loops, but
|
||
|
is less effective for composite material or music with soft
|
||
|
or breathy note onsets.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-split-join">
|
||
|
<title>Split tool</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can use the split tool
|
||
|
<inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-split.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
to split a single segment
|
||
|
into two separate segments. To split your segment, select the
|
||
|
split tool and click on the segment you wish to split.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
By default segments are split on the closest barline to the
|
||
|
cursor, but this can be prevented by holding down Shift
|
||
|
while splitting the segment.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-split-by-pitch">
|
||
|
<title>Other Split functions</title>
|
||
|
<para>The Segments menu contains a number of other Split functions.</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Split on Silence</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split on Silence</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
splits the selected segments on silences.
|
||
|
This function works slightly differently depending
|
||
|
on whether the selected segments contain audio or
|
||
|
MIDI data. For audio segments, it offers you a
|
||
|
dialog in which you can choose a threshold below
|
||
|
which the segment is considered "silent"; it then
|
||
|
splits the segment whenever its amplitude falls
|
||
|
below this threshold. For MIDI segments, it simply
|
||
|
splits the segment everywhere that a full bar of
|
||
|
silence occurs.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Split by Pitch</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split by Pitch...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
splits the currently selected segments into higher and
|
||
|
lower parts.
|
||
|
|
||
|
This function invokes a dialog allowing you to
|
||
|
choose a pitch as a "split point", and then splits
|
||
|
the selected segments in half with all the notes on
|
||
|
or above that split point in the "higher" segment
|
||
|
and all the notes below it in the "lower".
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If the music in the segment consists of two separate
|
||
|
parts (e.g. left and right hand piano parts) that
|
||
|
are not always completely on either side of a single
|
||
|
split point, you may with to select the "ranging
|
||
|
split-point" option. If this is selected,
|
||
|
Rosegarden will attempt to track the two parts as
|
||
|
they move up and down, usually doing a slightly
|
||
|
better job of separating out notes that were
|
||
|
intended to lie in the two separate parts.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The resulting segments are both created on the same
|
||
|
track, with one overlapping the other.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Split by Recording Source</term><listitem><para><menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split by Recording Source...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> splits the currently selected segments according to the MIDI channel and device their events were recorded from.</para><para>If you have recorded events from more than one MIDI channel or device into the a single segment, you can use this function to split them into separate segments afterwards. Select the channel or device whose events you want to split out, and the segment will be split into two segments, one containing events from the selected channel or device and the other containing the remaining events. The two segments are both created on the same track, with one overlapping the other.</para><para>See also <link linkend="recording">Recording</link> and <link linkend="track-recording-filters">Track recording filters</link> for more details on how to select the source MIDI channel or device for a recording.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Split at Time</term><listitem><para>The <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Split at Time...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function simply splits the currently selected segments into two parts at the time you specify.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-tempo-timesig">
|
||
|
<title>Tempo and Time Signature</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="tempo">
|
||
|
<title>Tempo in Rosegarden</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; considers a composition to be accompanied by a
|
||
|
single stream of "tempo changes" and "time signature
|
||
|
changes", which you can edit to adjust the tempo and the
|
||
|
number and structure of beats in each bar.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A tempo change
|
||
|
can be to a constant fixed tempo, or it can be "ramped"
|
||
|
— changing smoothly to a different target tempo at a
|
||
|
given future time. Each tempo change takes effect until the
|
||
|
following one is reached, so any two consecutive tempo changes
|
||
|
together describe a region that will be played at a constant
|
||
|
or smoothly ramping tempo.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Tempo and time signature are related, because &rosegarden;
|
||
|
displays tempo in beats per minute, and the duration of a
|
||
|
beat depends on the time signature. &rosegarden; only
|
||
|
permits a single time signature to be in effect in any given
|
||
|
bar (that is, you can't have different time signatures in
|
||
|
different tracks). Each new time signature causes a new bar
|
||
|
to start, so you can place two time signatures closer
|
||
|
together than the natural bar duration in order to obtain a
|
||
|
partial bar.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="tempo-ruler">
|
||
|
<title>Tempo rulers</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The &rosegarden; <link linkend="segment-view">track editor</link>, <link
|
||
|
linkend="matrix-view">matrix editor</link> and <link
|
||
|
linkend="notation-view">notation editor</link> each contain
|
||
|
a tempo ruler, which can be optionally displayed at the top
|
||
|
of the editing area.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-temporuler.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s tempo ruler (and the bar and beat ruler beneath it)</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The tempo ruler shows changes to tempo and time
|
||
|
signature throughout the composition, and can be used for
|
||
|
editing tempo.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To increase or decrease the tempo within the range of a
|
||
|
single tempo change, click and drag the horizontal line (or
|
||
|
sloped line, for ramped tempos) representing that tempo
|
||
|
upwards or downwards.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To insert a new tempo change, right-click on the ruler
|
||
|
for a menu and select <guimenuitem>Insert Tempo
|
||
|
Change</guimenuitem>. This will insert a new tempo change
|
||
|
with the same tempo as the prior one, which you can then drag
|
||
|
to increase or decrease.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also click and drag the starting point of a
|
||
|
tempo change left or right to move that tempo change to a
|
||
|
different time, and you can click and drag the ending point of
|
||
|
a tempo change up or down to make the tempo ramp gradually
|
||
|
towards an ending tempo value.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Double-click on the tempo ruler to open the <link linkend="tempo-timesig">tempo and
|
||
|
time signature editor</link>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="tempo-timesig">
|
||
|
<title>Tempo and time signature editor</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-tempotimesig.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s tempo and time signature editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The tempo and time signature editor window lists all of the tempo and time signature changes in the composition. You can edit an individual tempo or time signature change by double-clicking on it.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="tempo-edit">
|
||
|
<title>Changing Tempo</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can edit an existing tempo change, or add a new one, by using the <link linkend="tempo-ruler">tempo ruler</link>, by double-clicking on the tempo display in the <link linkend="transport">Transport window</link>, by using the <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Add Tempo Change...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> menu function, or by double-clicking on an existing tempo in the <link linkend="tempo-timesig">tempo and time signature editor</link>. Each of these will bring you to some variation of the tempo editing dialog:</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-tempodialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s tempo dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>To set a new tempo, either dial it into the numeric tempo spinbox at the top, or else click repeatedly on the Tap button at approximately the speed you want and let &rosegarden; work out the tempo for you.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>By default, a new tempo is "fixed"; that is, the tempo remains constant from the tempo change until the next tempo change is reached. Alternatively, you can tell &rosegarden; to make the tempo ramp smoothly to a particular value, or to the following tempo value, by the point at which the next tempo change is reached. See also <link linkend="tempo">Tempo</link> for more details on tempo handling.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="time-signature">
|
||
|
<title>Time signature</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To change the time signature, use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Add Time Signature Change...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> or double-click on the existing time signature in the <link linkend="transport">Transport window</link> or <link linkend="tempo-timesig">tempo and time signature editor</link>.</para><para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-timesigdialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s time signature dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="tempo-from-segment">
|
||
|
<title>Setting tempo from an existing segment</title>
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; provides two ways to set tempo from a segment that you have recorded or imported:</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Audio Segment Duration</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>Use the <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Set Tempo to Audio Segment Duration</guimenuitem></menuchoice> function when you have imported or recorded an audio segment that you know is exactly one bar long, and you want to ensure that the tempo for surrounding note events is set appropriately.</para><para>This function uses the duration of the selected segment (which must be an audio segment of a single bar) to work out a single matching tempo setting. It does not analyse the content of the audio segment in any way; it simply looks at how long it is.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Beat Segment</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Set Tempos from Beat Segment</guimenuitem></menuchoice> analyses a segment of MIDI events that are assumed to be at beat positions for the current time signature, and sets a series of tempo changes according to the time elapsed between consecutive beats.</para>
|
||
|
<para>You can use this to set an overall tempo map for a composition by "tapping" tempo in a recorded segment. For example, you can record from a MIDI keyboard and tap a series of single notes at approximate beat positions, speeding up and slowing down gradually; then select the recorded segment and use this function to set a tempo map that speeds up and slows down to match your tapping.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="markers-ranges-loops">
|
||
|
<title>Markers, ranges, and loops</title>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="markers">
|
||
|
<title>Markers</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Markers are moments in time that have labels. You can
|
||
|
create any number of markers in your &rosegarden; composition,
|
||
|
to define particular points that you wish to remember the
|
||
|
locations of. Marker positions and labels will be saved in
|
||
|
your &rosegarden; file.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Markers are shown in the main ruler at the top of each
|
||
|
of &rosegarden;'s editor windows.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-markerloop.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>A marker and a loop range</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>To add
|
||
|
a new marker, double-click on the marker area (top half) of
|
||
|
the ruler to open the marker editor. Make sure &rosegarden;'s
|
||
|
playback pointer (see <link linkend="transport">The
|
||
|
Transport</link>) is in the location you want to add the
|
||
|
marker at, and then click the Add button to add a new marker
|
||
|
at the playback position. You can then double-click on the
|
||
|
marker's entry in the marker editor window to edit its name or
|
||
|
adjust its location.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Click on the text of a marker in the marker ruler to
|
||
|
move the playback pointer directly to that marker.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can set a <link linkend="ranges-loops">loop range</link>
|
||
|
between two marker positions, by clicking in the area between
|
||
|
the markers in the marker ruler with the Shift key
|
||
|
pressed.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="quick_marker">
|
||
|
<title>Quick Marker</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The quick marker is a special moment in time that can be defined
|
||
|
on the fly with a single key (by default Ctrl-1) from the main window
|
||
|
(track editor). Once defined it appears as a red line in the loop ruler
|
||
|
(it does not appear among other markers, since it does not have a label).
|
||
|
At any time when in the track editor you can jump to the quick marker
|
||
|
position with a single key (by default simply 1).
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-quickmarker.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>Quick Marker at the start of the third bar</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A typical use of the quick marker is when you want to record the same bars
|
||
|
on different instruments: after setting the quick marker at the first bar of
|
||
|
the working interval, it is easy to jump to the quick marker each time you need
|
||
|
to record a new part.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that the quick marker position is not saved in your &rosegarden; file.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="ranges-loops">
|
||
|
<title>Ranges and loops</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; allows you to highlight a period of time in the
|
||
|
main ruler, which will be used as a "range" for editing
|
||
|
operations and which will be looped during playback.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To set the current range, click and drag with the Shift
|
||
|
key pressed on the subdivided area of the main ruler at the
|
||
|
top of the editing window. The range that you drag will be
|
||
|
highlighted in white as you drag it, and will snap to the
|
||
|
nearest beat boundary at both ends. Any subsequent playback
|
||
|
will then be constrained to looping this range.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also set a range between two <link
|
||
|
linkend="markers">markers</link> by shift-clicking between the
|
||
|
marker positions in the marker ruler, or set a range using the
|
||
|
<link linkend="transport-overview">Transport</link> window.
|
||
|
The Transport contains small buttons to set the start and end
|
||
|
of the current range to the current playback pointer position.
|
||
|
Either of these methods allows you to set more precise end
|
||
|
points for your range than you can with click-drag.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To clear a range and restore normal playback, click on
|
||
|
the subdivided area of the main ruler with the Shift key
|
||
|
pressed, or toggle the loop button on the Transport.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that playback looping when a range is defined is
|
||
|
not the same thing as the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-segmentparameterbox">repeating
|
||
|
segment</link> function available in the segment parameters
|
||
|
(which seamlessly repeats individual segments rather than
|
||
|
causing the transport to jump).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="range-operations">
|
||
|
<title>Range editing</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can carry out edits
|
||
|
on the current range in order to cut and paste sections
|
||
|
of music that include the relevant parts of all
|
||
|
segments, tempos and time signatures within the range.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Set a range and then use the <menuchoice> <guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Cut
|
||
|
Range</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> or
|
||
|
<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Copy
|
||
|
Range</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu functions to cut or
|
||
|
copy the range to the clipboard.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can paste a range using the standard <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Edit</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu function
|
||
|
to overlay its contents onto the rest of the composition at
|
||
|
the current playback pointer position, or you can use
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu lang="en">Edit</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Paste Range</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to
|
||
|
insert the range from the clipboard into the composition at
|
||
|
the current playback pointer position.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="range-insert">
|
||
|
<title>Inserting a range</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also insert an empty range at the current
|
||
|
playback position using the <menuchoice> <guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Insert
|
||
|
Range</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> menu function. You can
|
||
|
specify how much space you want to insert, and then all of
|
||
|
the segment content, tempos and time signatures following
|
||
|
the playback position will be pushed along in time by that
|
||
|
duration to leave an empty space.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="triggered-segments">
|
||
|
<title>Triggered segments</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A triggered segment is a segment that does not appear on
|
||
|
the main canvas and is not positioned at a particular time or
|
||
|
on any particular instrument, but is instead triggered during
|
||
|
playback by one or more notes in other segments. These
|
||
|
triggering notes serve as a shorthand for the full triggered
|
||
|
segment, in the same way as written ornaments such as trills
|
||
|
in notation serve as shorthand for the notes that make up the
|
||
|
trill. One use of triggered segments is in fact for
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-ornaments">playing ornaments</link>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden can optionally stretch or squash each triggered
|
||
|
segment to match the duration of the note that triggers it, and
|
||
|
can raise or lower the pitch and velocity of the segment likewise
|
||
|
to match. A triggered segment is played on the same instrument as
|
||
|
its triggering event.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-triggersegment.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Trigger Segment dialog, as reached from the matrix editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Triggered segments are managed through a window available
|
||
|
via the <menuchoice> <guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Segments</guimenu><guimenuitem>Manage Triggered
|
||
|
Segments</guimenuitem></menuchoice> option in the main segment
|
||
|
canvas. To make a new triggered segment, copy a segment or part
|
||
|
of a segment to Rosegarden's clipboard, then use the <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Paste as New
|
||
|
Triggered Segment</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu option in this
|
||
|
manager window. You can then set a particular note to play this
|
||
|
triggered segment instead of the original note, using the
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Trigger Segment...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
|
||
|
function in the matrix or <menuchoice> <guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Note</guimenu><guimenuitem
|
||
|
lang="en">Ornaments</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Trigger
|
||
|
Ornament...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> function in the notation
|
||
|
editor.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>When triggering a segment, you will be offered a choice for
|
||
|
how it is played in terms of timing, because the triggered segment
|
||
|
(or ornament) may have a different underlying duration from your
|
||
|
triggering note. The options for playback timing are:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>As stored</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Play the triggered segment with a start time
|
||
|
coinciding with that of the note, and at the original speed.
|
||
|
Keep playing the triggered segment until it ends, even if it
|
||
|
is longer than the triggering note.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Truncate if longer than note</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Play the triggered segment with a start time
|
||
|
coinciding with that of the note, and at the original speed.
|
||
|
If the triggered segment is longer than the triggering note,
|
||
|
truncate it so that it ends at the end time of the note.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>End at same time as note</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Play the triggered segment with its end time
|
||
|
coinciding with the end of the note, and at the original
|
||
|
speed. This means the start of the triggered segment may be
|
||
|
chopped off if it is longer than the triggering note.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Stretch or squash segment to note duration</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Speed up or slow down the triggered segment so that it
|
||
|
fits exactly into the duration of the triggering note. This
|
||
|
is the default.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A triggered segment may contain silence at the start or end,
|
||
|
and this will be "played" (and stretched or squashed if
|
||
|
appropriate) as well as the notes and other events in the segment.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It is not currently possible to make a triggered segment
|
||
|
start playing before the start time of its triggering note. You
|
||
|
also can't trigger a segment from within another triggered
|
||
|
segment, and you can't trigger audio segments.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To edit the contents of a triggered segment, either
|
||
|
double-click on it in the Manage Triggered Segments window, or
|
||
|
double-click on any note that triggers it. Apart from editing the
|
||
|
notes in the segment, you can also change the duration of the
|
||
|
segment itself from the Edit menu of the resulting event list
|
||
|
view. Remember that editing a triggered segment will affect all
|
||
|
the notes that trigger it, not just the one that you
|
||
|
double-clicked to get to the editing window.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="transport">
|
||
|
<title>The Transport</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
When you play a composition,
|
||
|
&rosegarden; sweeps a playback pointer across
|
||
|
the tracks from left to right playing the contents of the
|
||
|
segments as it crosses them. The pointer's position on the
|
||
|
screen is tracked and controlled by a window called the
|
||
|
Transport.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="transport-overview"><title>Overview</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-transport.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Transport window</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If the Transport isn't visible, you can activate it with <menuchoice> <guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Transport</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The Transport shows the time reached by the playback
|
||
|
pointer, in seconds by default.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can switch it to show
|
||
|
musical time (bar and beat counts), musical time with a flashing
|
||
|
visual metronome, or audio sample frame times, using the topmost
|
||
|
of the small buttons <inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-button-bar-time.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject> on the left of the transport window.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The
|
||
|
button immediately below that <inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-button-from-end.png"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject> toggles the display so as to show
|
||
|
time remaining to the end of the composition instead of from the
|
||
|
start.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The main controls on the transport start the sequencer playing
|
||
|
and pause it, fast forward the pointer position, rewind it, stop
|
||
|
it or jump to beginning or end of composition.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The transport display also shows the tempo and time signature in
|
||
|
effect at the current playback position. Double-click on either
|
||
|
of these to insert a new tempo or time signature change. See
|
||
|
<link linkend="segment-view-tempo-timesig">Tempo and Time
|
||
|
Signature</link> for more ways to adjust these elsewhere in Rosegarden.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can also double-click anywhere on the main time display on
|
||
|
the transport window, to enter a precise time that you want the
|
||
|
playback position to be set to.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Additional controls and a &MIDI; event display are hidden on
|
||
|
the bottom flap on the transport, which can be toggled on or off
|
||
|
using the arrow button next to it at the left. Also on this extra
|
||
|
portion there are buttons for recording, setting the loop start
|
||
|
and end (see <link linkend="ranges-loops">Ranges and loops</link>),
|
||
|
soloing individual tracks, turning on or off the metronome (see
|
||
|
<link linkend="studio-metronome">Metronomes</link>), and silencing
|
||
|
your MIDI devices (the panic button). </para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="recording">
|
||
|
<title>Recording</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackbuttons.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>Track buttons in various states of recording readiness</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To record a new segment into a track, first make sure the
|
||
|
right tracks are armed for recording by selecting the red
|
||
|
(for audio tracks) or yellow (for MIDI tracks) LED-style
|
||
|
buttons on the track labels, and then use the <link
|
||
|
linkend="transport-overview">Transport's</link> record
|
||
|
control. This has the effect of both starting the transport,
|
||
|
thus playing the existing composition, and recording into the
|
||
|
appropriate track, or tracks.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can record any number of &MIDI; and audio tracks at once so long
|
||
|
as your computer is powerful enough, and you have enough disk space.
|
||
|
Be careful not to accidentally leave tracks selected when you have
|
||
|
finished using them and are trying to record somewhere else.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Alternatively you can use punch-in record to separate the acts
|
||
|
of starting the transport and entering record mode. Punch-in
|
||
|
record is toggled with the <keycap>Space</keycap> bar. You can press
|
||
|
<keycap>Space</keycap>
|
||
|
while playing a composition to switch instantly between
|
||
|
playback and recording without stopping the transport, or you
|
||
|
can use <keycap>Space</keycap> to arm for recording when the transport is
|
||
|
stopped, so that a subsequent Play will in fact record as
|
||
|
well. (The latter is handy when synchronising to an <link
|
||
|
linkend="transport-external">external transport</link>.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you record to MIDI tracks, you will record from the
|
||
|
MIDI devices that are selected for recording in the
|
||
|
<link linkend="studio-device-editor">MIDI device
|
||
|
manager</link>, as filtered through the <link
|
||
|
linkend="track-recording-filters">track level recording filter</link>
|
||
|
and the global <link linkend="studio-midi-filters">MIDI filters</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you record to audio tracks, your recording to each track
|
||
|
will be from the input currently selected for that track's
|
||
|
instrument in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">instrument
|
||
|
parameter box</link>. This will either be an external audio
|
||
|
input or an audio submaster or master (for performing
|
||
|
mixdowns). If it's an external input, it will by default
|
||
|
record from your soundcard's first available physical record
|
||
|
in. You may wish to use a JACK connection tool to
|
||
|
connect some other JACK audio application to the input
|
||
|
instead. See also <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-routing">Audio Routing</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="transport-external">
|
||
|
<title>Synchronising to external transports</title>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="transport-jack">
|
||
|
<title>JACK Transport</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden supports the JACK transport mechanism for
|
||
|
synchronising its transport with other JACK applications on
|
||
|
the same computer. To activate it, go to
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Configure Rosegarden...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
and check the <guimenuitem>Use JACK transport</guimenuitem> box.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>When the JACK transport is in use, all of the applications
|
||
|
that are subscribed to it share a common transport control, and
|
||
|
you can start, stop, and move the transport from any one of
|
||
|
them.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Many Linux audio applications that use the JACK audio
|
||
|
server also support JACK transport: consult their
|
||
|
documentation for details of whether and how.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="transport-mtc">
|
||
|
<title>MIDI Time Code</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden supports MIDI Time Code (MTC) synchronisation in
|
||
|
master and slave modes. This is particularly useful for
|
||
|
synchronising the Rosegarden transport with a hardware
|
||
|
MTC-capable device, or with software running on other
|
||
|
computers connected via MIDI.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>To make Rosegarden the MTC Master, so that it will
|
||
|
control any MTC slave device or application connected to it,
|
||
|
go to
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Configure Rosegarden...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
and in the MIDI page's MIDI Sync tab, select "MTC
|
||
|
Master" from the MIDI Time Code menu. To make Rosegarden an
|
||
|
MTC Slave so that Rosegarden's transport will automatically
|
||
|
be synchronised with incoming MTC events, select "MTC
|
||
|
Slave".
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="infrared-remote-controls">
|
||
|
<title>Infrared Remote Controls</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden supports infrared remote controls for
|
||
|
almost all transport functions. In order to use it,
|
||
|
you need either the internal LIRC client, which is
|
||
|
an optional feature at Rosegarden's compile time,
|
||
|
or the KDE IRKick application (KDE LIRC daemon)
|
||
|
that you can find in your Linux distribution's
|
||
|
repositories. In both cases, you need to install
|
||
|
and configure the LIRC server daemon. The exact
|
||
|
details depend on your remote control and receiver,
|
||
|
and you should refer to the <ulink url="http://www.lirc.org/html">
|
||
|
LIRC web site</ulink> for more information.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can find more details online about the internal
|
||
|
LIRC client configuration file and IRKick basics, at
|
||
|
<ulink url="http://www.rosegardenmusic.com/resources/documents/infrared-remotes.shtml">
|
||
|
Rosegarden's web site</ulink>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="studio">
|
||
|
<title>The Studio</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-introduction">
|
||
|
<title>Devices, instruments and connections</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden uses the term Studio to refer to everything it
|
||
|
knows about the sound systems attached to the computer. This
|
||
|
may include &MIDI; and audio hardware and other sound software,
|
||
|
and includes information about connections, configuration,
|
||
|
&MIDI; patches and so on. The Studio is built-in to every
|
||
|
composition you create with Rosegarden.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Three pieces of terminology are essential here:
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Device</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>A <quote>device</quote>, as far as Rosegarden is
|
||
|
concerned, is simply something capable of producing
|
||
|
sounds. This may be a MIDI or audio device. MIDI
|
||
|
devices do not necessarily correspond directly to
|
||
|
physical MIDI ports: they are just things with names
|
||
|
that you can refer to, expected to work in particular
|
||
|
ways. Configuration information such as MIDI patch maps
|
||
|
can be attached to devices.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Instrument</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Each device has a number of
|
||
|
<quote>instruments</quote>, each of which is assumed
|
||
|
to make a particular sound. These are the things that
|
||
|
you can assign tracks to in order to choose which
|
||
|
sound they play. By default, a device contains 16
|
||
|
instruments, created for you at startup: if the device
|
||
|
is a MIDI device, then these will each be initialised
|
||
|
to one of the 16 MIDI channels. The instrument is
|
||
|
where you set all the properties of a particular
|
||
|
voice, such as program settings, reverb, volume etc.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Connection</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>While a MIDI device is simply a name and a
|
||
|
collection of configuration information, the
|
||
|
<quote>connection</quote> specifies which MIDI port it
|
||
|
is physically attached to. This can be configured in
|
||
|
the <link linkend="studio-device-editor">MIDI device
|
||
|
manager</link>. (Audio and synth plugin devices do not
|
||
|
have connections in the same way.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For example, imagine a setup consisting of a PC with two
|
||
|
physical MIDI ports, one of which has an external synth
|
||
|
attached to it. Here you would normally configure Rosegarden
|
||
|
so as to have one MIDI device, corresponding to the synth.
|
||
|
You could then configure this device with the correct name and
|
||
|
patch map, and then specify a connection for it that
|
||
|
corresponded to the relevant MIDI port on your soundcard.
|
||
|
Each of the 16 default instruments on the device could then be
|
||
|
configured with a suitable program, and you would then assign
|
||
|
tracks to those.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
In practice, Rosegarden will by default create a device for
|
||
|
each of the available connections on startup. So in the
|
||
|
example above, two MIDI devices will be created by default
|
||
|
even though you only need one. You would generally then
|
||
|
rename and apply patch maps to the first, and delete or
|
||
|
simply not use the second. Remember that there is no way
|
||
|
for Rosegarden to know what synths you actually have plugged
|
||
|
in to the MIDI ports on your computer: for this reason, the
|
||
|
devices created at startup are just intended to be a default
|
||
|
set, and it's up to you to ensure that the devices you
|
||
|
configure match those you are really using.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Once configured, the studio setup is stored with every
|
||
|
Rosegarden-format file you save.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-device-editor">
|
||
|
<title>Managing MIDI devices</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-devicemanager.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The MIDI device manager</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The MIDI device manager dialog shows you the MIDI devices
|
||
|
that you currently have available to you, and where they are
|
||
|
connected. To reach this dialog, use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Studio</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Manage MIDI Devices</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
As described in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-introduction">Devices, Instruments and
|
||
|
Connections</link> section, by default Rosegarden tries to
|
||
|
provide a plausible set of devices for you at startup, and
|
||
|
to make sensible connections for those devices. But the
|
||
|
default configuration might not always be suitable, and so
|
||
|
this dialog allows you to rename devices and modify their
|
||
|
connections and play/record direction.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Each of the Play devices listed here provides a target for
|
||
|
MIDI tracks to talk to: if you add a new Play device, you
|
||
|
will then have 16 new instruments on this device which you
|
||
|
can assign tracks to. If you then assign a connection for
|
||
|
that device, the tracks assigned to it will play to the
|
||
|
appropriate channel (depending on the instrument) of any
|
||
|
MIDI synth attached to that connection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para> The Record devices listed here represent possible
|
||
|
sources for recording MIDI. You can make one or more of them
|
||
|
current (so that Rosegarden will listen to them when
|
||
|
recording) using the checkboxes on each line, as shown in this
|
||
|
dialog. </para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-bank-editor">
|
||
|
<title>Managing banks and programs for MIDI devices</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-bankeditor.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The MIDI bank and program editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Remember that each MIDI device contains a number of
|
||
|
instruments, and that you can assign tracks to those
|
||
|
instruments. In MIDI terms, each instrument corresponds to
|
||
|
a single channel on your MIDI synth. You can choose which
|
||
|
of the available voices (sounds) on your synth each
|
||
|
instrument uses, but in order to do this, you need to let
|
||
|
Rosegarden know the names for all of the available voices.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This dialog allows you to attach banks of programs (names for
|
||
|
voices) to your MIDI devices, thus permitting each
|
||
|
instrument on a device to be set to use one of those voices
|
||
|
in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">Instrument
|
||
|
Parameter Box</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The usual way to set up the program names for a device is
|
||
|
simply to import them from one of the supplied device
|
||
|
(".rgd") files. To do this, select a device in the list on
|
||
|
the left of the dialog, then click the Import button below
|
||
|
the list and choose the .rgd file corresponding to your
|
||
|
synth.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If there is no current .rgd file available for your synth,
|
||
|
then you can use this dialog to create a new bank. To do this
|
||
|
you will have to find the program map in your synth's MIDI
|
||
|
Implementation Chart and enter all the names by hand: you can
|
||
|
then Export them to a .rgd file to share with other Rosegarden
|
||
|
users. Contact the rosegarden-user mailing list if you have
|
||
|
made a new .rgd file and would like to share it. (This is how
|
||
|
all of the existing .rgd files have come to be included with
|
||
|
Rosegarden: other users have contributed them.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-keymappings">
|
||
|
<title>Percussion Key Mappings</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Many MIDI synthesizers have at least one percussion program,
|
||
|
in which each "pitch" plays a different type of sound.
|
||
|
Rosegarden contains a dedicated percussion matrix editor to
|
||
|
view and edit notes against a scale consisting of the
|
||
|
correct names for the pitches, instead of against the
|
||
|
conventional piano keyboard pitch scale.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The key mappings available for a particular MIDI device are
|
||
|
also defined in the Rosegarden device (".rgd") file. Each
|
||
|
MIDI program that is defined as a percussion program can
|
||
|
have a key mapping associated with it; if there is one, then
|
||
|
it will be used by default in any track that is assigned to
|
||
|
this program. Like program and bank definitions, key
|
||
|
mappings can be imported from and exported to .rgd files.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-soundfonts">
|
||
|
<title>SoundFonts</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you happen to be using a soft-synth or soundcard synth
|
||
|
that uses SoundFont (.sf2) files, you can simply load the
|
||
|
correct program names directly from your .sf2 file into this
|
||
|
dialog. Just ask to Import as normal, and then choose the
|
||
|
.sf2 file that you are using instead of a .rgd file.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that the Studio only manages information about
|
||
|
existing MIDI devices for Rosegarden, it does not actually
|
||
|
handle tasks such as loading a SoundFont to your soundcard in
|
||
|
the first place. If you want to make sure a SoundFont is
|
||
|
loaded to your soundcard when Rosegarden starts up, you should
|
||
|
use the special "Load SoundFont to SoundBlaster card at
|
||
|
startup" option in the sequencer configuration in
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Configure Rosegarden...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-variations">
|
||
|
<title>Variations</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Some MIDI devices (for example, those from Roland)
|
||
|
organise their program names using a scheme known as
|
||
|
"variations". For these devices, you generally want to
|
||
|
select a program by first selecting the basic program name
|
||
|
— such as a piano — and then selecting one
|
||
|
of a set of variations on that program — such as an
|
||
|
electric piano. This is in contrast to General MIDI-based
|
||
|
synths, which organise their programs into banks and
|
||
|
expect you to choose a bank first and then a program from
|
||
|
that bank.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden can support devices that use variations, but
|
||
|
you still have to enter the program names in a bank
|
||
|
format. Internally, devices that use variations still use
|
||
|
MIDI bank select controllers to choose between the
|
||
|
variations; you need to find out from your synth's
|
||
|
documentation whether your device uses the LSB or MSB bank
|
||
|
select to choose variations, and which bank number
|
||
|
corresponds to which variation. You can then enter the
|
||
|
banks as normal, and use the "Show Variation list based on
|
||
|
MSB/LSB" option on the bank dialog to tell Rosegarden to
|
||
|
show variations instead of banks when displaying that
|
||
|
device in an instrument parameter box.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-midi-import">
|
||
|
<title>Program mapping on &MIDI; import</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
When you import a &MIDI; file into a composition, &rosegarden;
|
||
|
uses the existing studio setup to determine how to map the
|
||
|
&MIDI; programs onto &rosegarden; instruments. The aim is to
|
||
|
ensure that every &MIDI; program gets mapped to an instrument
|
||
|
that really exists in your studio (and thus is actually
|
||
|
attached to your computer), so that all the &MIDI; tracks
|
||
|
can be heard.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para><para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The &MIDI; program-change and bank-select events found in the
|
||
|
imported file are used when importing, but only as an aid to
|
||
|
help find the appropriate instrument for each &MIDI; track
|
||
|
from the set of instruments in your studio. So, for
|
||
|
example, if your studio is currently set up to contain only
|
||
|
<acronym>GM</acronym> instruments, and you import a &MIDI; file with <acronym>GS</acronym> program
|
||
|
changes onto it, &rosegarden; will remap the <acronym>GS</acronym> banks back
|
||
|
onto <acronym>GM</acronym> because they're all it knows that you have at the
|
||
|
time you import the file. It doesn't remember the original
|
||
|
<acronym>GS</acronym> program numbers.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para><para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
This means that you should always ensure that your studio is
|
||
|
correctly configured for the devices you actually have,
|
||
|
before you import the &MIDI; file. Otherwise the program data
|
||
|
in the &MIDI; file may be lost.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-audio-routing">
|
||
|
<title>Audio Routing</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Any Rosegarden track assigned to an audio or synth plugin
|
||
|
instrument becomes part of Rosegarden's audio routing
|
||
|
architecture. There are 16 audio instruments and 16 synth
|
||
|
plugin instruments, and each of these has a set of adjustable
|
||
|
parameters including fader level, pan, effects and so on.
|
||
|
These are generally configurable in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">Instrument
|
||
|
Parameter Box</link> or <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-mixer">audio mixer</link>. Each audio
|
||
|
instrument also has an input connection, and both audio and
|
||
|
synth plugin instruments have an output connection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>An instrument's input connection defines where Rosegarden
|
||
|
will read audio data from when recording to this instrument.
|
||
|
The most usual setting would be to one of Rosegarden's external
|
||
|
audio inputs, the number of which is configurable in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-mixer">audio mixer</link>. These
|
||
|
correspond to JACK audio ports exposed by Rosegarden, to which
|
||
|
you can connect outputs from any other JACK audio application or
|
||
|
soundcard capture ports using an external JACK router
|
||
|
application such as <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://qjackctl.sf.net/">QJackCtl</ulink>. You can also
|
||
|
set an instrument's audio input to the output of one of
|
||
|
Rosegarden's built-in audio submasters or master output for
|
||
|
mixdowns.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>An instrument's output connection defines where the audio
|
||
|
goes when played. Instruments default to sending their audio to
|
||
|
Rosegarden's master output, which is another (stereo pair of)
|
||
|
external JACK port(s) that can then be connected up using the
|
||
|
same external JACK router. However, Rosegarden also supports up
|
||
|
to eight internal submaster busses, to which you can send
|
||
|
instrument outputs instead so as to group instruments into
|
||
|
related categories. You can control the number and routing of
|
||
|
these in the <link linkend="studio-audio-mixer">audio
|
||
|
mixer</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden currently supports effects using a set of pre-fader
|
||
|
insert effects slots for each audio instrument. You cannot
|
||
|
yet assign effects to the submaster busses, and Rosegarden
|
||
|
does not yet support send effects, although you can obtain
|
||
|
similar results using an external JACK effects and mixing
|
||
|
architecture.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Some further details of audio routing configuration,
|
||
|
mixing, and effects are discussed in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-mixer">audio mixer</link>, <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">instrument
|
||
|
parameter box</link> and <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-plugins">audio plugins</link> sections.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-midi-routing">
|
||
|
<title>MIDI Routing</title>
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; is able to instantly send incoming MIDI events to
|
||
|
some output device and MIDI channel. This feature is known as MIDI Thru.</para>
|
||
|
<para>MIDI Thru is enabled by default in &rosegarden;. You may want
|
||
|
to globally disable it using the menu option <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Studio</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>MIDI Thru Routing</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, if you prefer
|
||
|
to use an external MIDI routing system. There is also a global filter by
|
||
|
MIDI event type, which you may use to ignore some event types and let other
|
||
|
types to be routed. It is explained in the section <link linkend="studio-midi-filters">
|
||
|
MIDI filters</link>.</para>
|
||
|
<para>MIDI Thru routing works quite differently when &rosegarden; is playing
|
||
|
or stopped than when it is recording.</para>
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>When &rosegarden; is playing or in stopped state, the MIDI
|
||
|
thru function routes events to the selected track instrument. The selected
|
||
|
track has its track name highlighted.</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>When &rosegarden; is recording, the MIDI events are routed
|
||
|
to the armed track instruments, based on the <link linkend="track-recording-filters">
|
||
|
recording filters</link>. It doesn't
|
||
|
matter which track is selected. Only one instrument is selected for each event,
|
||
|
corresponding to the first track with a matching record filter.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-audio-mixer">
|
||
|
<title>The Audio Mixer</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-audiomixer.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Audio Mixer</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden's audio mixer window, reached through
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Studio</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Audio
|
||
|
Mixer</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, resembles a hardware audio
|
||
|
mixer and provides a way to see and change the state of a
|
||
|
number of audio instruments at once. It contains many of
|
||
|
the same controls as found in the audio and synth plugin
|
||
|
<link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">instrument
|
||
|
parameter boxes</link>, most importantly a playback level
|
||
|
meter and fader control for each audio and synth plugin
|
||
|
instrument, as well as routing controls, pan, mono/stereo
|
||
|
and effects plugin slots.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The audio mixer window is also where you see and control the
|
||
|
master audio output level (at the far right of the picture
|
||
|
above), as well as the record level (to the left of the master
|
||
|
fader) and submaster output levels.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The audio mixer's <menuchoice> <guimenu
|
||
|
lang="en">Settings</guimenu></menuchoice> menu is particularly
|
||
|
relevant. Apart from controlling what will be shown in the
|
||
|
mixer window, this menu also contains the <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-routing">audio routing</link> settings
|
||
|
for the number of stereo audio record inputs available and the
|
||
|
number of submasters. These are studio settings whose values
|
||
|
are saved with your Rosegarden format file.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that if you are not actually using any submasters
|
||
|
(i.e. if there are no instruments configured to route their
|
||
|
output to a submaster) you may see a small performance
|
||
|
improvement if you set the number of submasters explicitly to
|
||
|
None, rather than keeping unused ones in the configuration.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-midi-mixer">
|
||
|
<title>The MIDI Mixer</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-midimixer.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s MIDI Mixer</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden's MIDI mixer window, reached through
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Studio</guimenu> <guimenuitem>MIDI
|
||
|
Mixer</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, provides a way to see and
|
||
|
edit the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-midi">instrument
|
||
|
parameter values</link> for a number of MIDI instruments at once.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The window is organised using a tabbed pane. Along the
|
||
|
bottom, you will see one tab for each playback MIDI device in
|
||
|
your studio configuration. When you select a device tab, the
|
||
|
rest of the window will update to show the controls for the 16
|
||
|
instruments of that device.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The controls shown for each instrument are those set up in the
|
||
|
<!-- !!! link linkend="studio-device-controllers" --> control
|
||
|
parameter manager, as well as volume (corresponding to the
|
||
|
MIDI volume control change, not to MIDI velocity or audio dB
|
||
|
levels) and an approximate output level indicator.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-plugins">
|
||
|
<title>Audio Plugins</title>
|
||
|
<para>An audio plugin is a piece of software, separate from
|
||
|
Rosegarden, that Rosegarden can load and use in order to perform
|
||
|
a particular audio processing task. These can be broadly
|
||
|
divided into effects plugins and synth plugins. Effects plugins
|
||
|
take an audio input and manipulate it to produce a different
|
||
|
audio output; synth plugins take MIDI-like events as input and
|
||
|
turn them into audio output. Rosegarden uses the Linux standard
|
||
|
LADSPA plugin API for effects and the DSSI plugin API for
|
||
|
synths, permitting the use of large numbers of open-source
|
||
|
plugins made available by many developers.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The use of plugins has a cost in CPU time, as audio
|
||
|
processing in real time usually takes a significant amount of
|
||
|
work even on a modern CPU. It also has a potential cost in
|
||
|
reliability: when Rosegarden is running a plugin, if the plugin
|
||
|
hangs or crashes, so does Rosegarden. Many plugins are very
|
||
|
reliable, but it's inevitable that some will not be so well
|
||
|
tested.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-plugins-effects">
|
||
|
<title>Effects plugins</title> <para>An effects plugin is
|
||
|
something that you can use to modify an audio signal in a
|
||
|
controllable way. Examples include reverb, delay effects,
|
||
|
dynamic compression and so on.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Every audio or synth-plugin instrument in Rosegarden has
|
||
|
five associated effects slots. By default these are empty,
|
||
|
but you can load plugins into them in order to chain up to
|
||
|
five effects onto the audio signal before it goes through
|
||
|
fader level and pan processing.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To load a plugin to a slot, click its button on the
|
||
|
<link linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-audio">instrument
|
||
|
parameter box</link>:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-pluginbuttons.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>Plugin Slot Buttons</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>(These buttons are also optionally available in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-audio-mixer">audio mixer</link> window.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Clicking a plugin button will
|
||
|
pop up the plugin dialog. This shows you
|
||
|
the available categories of effects in the first menu; select
|
||
|
one, and you can then choose your plugin in the second menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-plugin-dialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>A &rosegarden; Plugin Dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Below the plugin selection menus, the dialog gives you a
|
||
|
varying number of rotary controllers showing all the
|
||
|
modifiable parameters for the plugin you have selected. To
|
||
|
change a value, just click a rotary and drag up and down or
|
||
|
left and right. (Up or right to raise the value, down or left
|
||
|
to lower it.) You can also roll the mouse wheel to change the
|
||
|
value, or click with the middle mouse button to reset it to
|
||
|
its initial default.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It is also possible to copy one plugin with its current
|
||
|
configuration into another slot, so as to use the same plugin
|
||
|
settings with more than one instrument, or to base one plugin
|
||
|
configuration on another. Just click the Copy button when you
|
||
|
have the plugin set up the way you want it, and then open
|
||
|
another plugin slot's plugin dialog and click Paste.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Finally, you can use the Bypass toggle to remove a
|
||
|
plugin temporarily from processing while retaining its
|
||
|
configuration.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-plugins-synths">
|
||
|
<title>Synth plugins</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Synth plugins can be used in place of hardware or standalone
|
||
|
soft-synth MIDI devices, to generate sounds from your note
|
||
|
event segments.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Using a synth plugin gives you somewhat better control
|
||
|
and repeatability than using an external MIDI device, because
|
||
|
Rosegarden will be able to load the correct plugins for you
|
||
|
and use the correct settings the next time you load your same
|
||
|
file. Plugins may also offer better timing resolution than
|
||
|
external MIDI devices, and synth plugin instruments have the
|
||
|
advantage of being routable like audio instruments, which also
|
||
|
means you can add effects plugins on top of them.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To make use of a synth plugin, first <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instruments">assign a track</link> to a
|
||
|
synth plugin instrument, and then load a synth plugin by
|
||
|
clicking on the topmost button in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-synth">instrument
|
||
|
parameter box</link>:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-synthpluginbuttons.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>Synth Plugin Buttons</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>This will bring up the same plugin dialog as shown above
|
||
|
for effects plugins, but with a list of synth plugins instead
|
||
|
of effects. Once again, you will be shown the particular set
|
||
|
of rotary parameters for the synth you have selected. Synth
|
||
|
plugins may also have "programs", selectable from a menu --
|
||
|
this menu will only appear if you have chosen a synth that supports
|
||
|
them. When you have selected and configured a synth plugin
|
||
|
for an instrument, any MIDI data on tracks assigned to that
|
||
|
instrument should play through that synth, as should
|
||
|
incoming MIDI data during recording or monitoring.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="studio-plugins-guis">
|
||
|
<title>Plugin native editor windows</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Most plugins can be controlled completely using the
|
||
|
rotary controllers in Rosegarden's plugin dialog. However, a
|
||
|
few plugins (generally synths) also have their own editor
|
||
|
windows which can be switched on or off from Rosegarden and
|
||
|
which may provide more complete or more organised
|
||
|
controls.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>When you select a plugin that has its own editor window,
|
||
|
the button at the lower left of the plugin dialog labelled
|
||
|
"Editor" will become active:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-plugineditorbutton.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>A Plugin Editor Button</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>(For synth plugins, there is a similar button in the
|
||
|
instrument parameter box.) Clicking this button should show
|
||
|
the plugin's own editor window. Any changes you make in this
|
||
|
editor window should also be reflected in Rosegarden's own
|
||
|
plugin dialog, if visible, and of course should be saved in
|
||
|
your Rosegarden file as normal.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-metronome">
|
||
|
<title>Metronomes</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden has two built-in metronomes, one for use during
|
||
|
recording and one that can be switched on during normal
|
||
|
playback. They work by sending notes to a MIDI instrument,
|
||
|
and both metronomes use the same instrument, pitch and
|
||
|
velocity information.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-metronome.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s metronome configuration dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To configure the metronomes, use
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Studio</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Manage Metronome</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
to bring up the metronome dialog.
|
||
|
Here you can select a MIDI instrument for the metronome and
|
||
|
choose the metronome's resolution (whether it should tick
|
||
|
once per beat, once per subdivision of a beat, or only once
|
||
|
per bar), pitch, and velocities. Properties such as the
|
||
|
actual voice the MIDI synth uses for the metronome tick
|
||
|
depend on the instrument selected, just as the voice used
|
||
|
for a MIDI track depends on the instrument that track is
|
||
|
assigned to. You can configure the instrument by assigning
|
||
|
a track to it on the main window and selecting the correct
|
||
|
program from the instrument parameter box.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The record and play metronomes can be switched on or off
|
||
|
from the Transport window, using the metronome button. This
|
||
|
button controls the record metronome when recording is armed
|
||
|
or in progress, and the play metronome at other times. By
|
||
|
default, the record metronome is switched on and the play
|
||
|
metronome switched off.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden also has a "visual metronome": the transport window
|
||
|
can be told to flash brightly to mark each beat. See <link
|
||
|
linkend="transport">the Transport section</link> for more
|
||
|
details.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-midi-filters">
|
||
|
<title>MIDI filters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-midifilter.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The MIDI filter dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Using this dialog you can decide which MIDI events Rosegarden
|
||
|
will ignore or accept, either when forwarding events using
|
||
|
MIDI THRU or when simply recording them. Use the check boxes
|
||
|
on this dialog to tell Rosegarden which types of MIDI events
|
||
|
you don't want to forward or record.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="studio-external-controllers">
|
||
|
<title>External MIDI control surfaces</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden's audio and MIDI mixer windows and main canvas can
|
||
|
also be controlled to some degree by an external MIDI device.
|
||
|
To set this up, you will need to use an ALSA MIDI connection
|
||
|
manager such as qjackctl to connect your MIDI controller
|
||
|
device to Rosegarden's "external controller" input and output
|
||
|
MIDI ports.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden accepts MIDI control change messages to adjust the
|
||
|
mixer track corresponding to the incoming MIDI channel on each
|
||
|
controller event, and also sends out MIDI messages when
|
||
|
something is changed in a mixer track in order to support
|
||
|
controllers with powered faders or knobs.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden accepts MIDI controller number 81 to change the
|
||
|
currently active window. Send controller 81 with data value 0-9
|
||
|
to select the main window, 10-19 to select the audio mixer
|
||
|
window or 20-29 to select the MIDI mixer window.</para>
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden accepts MIDI controller number 82 to change the
|
||
|
currently selected track in the main window. The stepping of
|
||
|
this controller depends on the number of tracks in the window --
|
||
|
the ratio of controller data value to track number will be
|
||
|
calculated so as to use the full MIDI controller data range,
|
||
|
provided there are no more than 128 tracks in the window.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="segment-instrument-parameters">
|
||
|
<title>Special Parameters</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="track-parameters">
|
||
|
<title>The Track Parameter Box</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-trackparameterbox.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s track parameter box</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The track parameter box can be found at the left side of the
|
||
|
&rosegarden; main window. It displays the parameters for the
|
||
|
currently selected track. (If you can't see it, try using <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Special Parameters</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
It allows you to assign instruments to tracks, control what
|
||
|
incoming &MIDI; data from which sources will be recorded to
|
||
|
particular tracks, control staff attributes (currently only for LilyPond
|
||
|
export,) make selections that govern how &MIDI; segments
|
||
|
will be created for each track that is assigned to a non-audio
|
||
|
instrument, and apply these selections to existing segments (as when
|
||
|
converting a trumpet part from an imported &MIDI; file to be
|
||
|
represented as notation playable by a real human on a real instrument,
|
||
|
for example.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>This box is divided into three sections:</para>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="track-playback-parameters">
|
||
|
<title>Playback parameters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These provide an alternative mechanism to the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-instruments">menu-based
|
||
|
system</link> of instrument assignment.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="track-recording-filters">
|
||
|
<title>Track recording filters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These provide you a way to control what events are recorded to this track. If you leave the default values ("all") for both parameters, every received event will be stored in the track. This setting is safe and convenient if you are recording only one MIDI track. Otherwise, you should adjust one or both parameters to select only the desired events for the track.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Device</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>You can record from only one of the available devices marked for recording in the <link linkend="studio-device-editor">device manager</link>, or from all of them simultaneously.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Channel</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>You can record from all channels, or limit recording to only one of the 16 available MIDI channels. In this case, only MIDI channel messages matching the channel number will be recorded, and system messages not having a channel (as system exclusive events) will be discarded.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Both parameters are cummulative: you can filter only a device, only a channel, or both a device and a channel simultaneously. It is not mandatory to ensure mutually exclusive selections for all the armed tracks, but if you don't do so you will find duplicated events at several recorded tracks.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The recording filters are also used to <link linkend="studio-midi-routing">route MIDI events </link> to the assigned track instrument when you are recording.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="track-staff-params">
|
||
|
<title>Staff export options</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These provide you with a means of exporting notation to render
|
||
|
at either normal, small, or tiny size (eg. for printing certain
|
||
|
parts at cue size,) and allow you to export a variety of nested
|
||
|
brackets.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You are responsible for creating a series of bracket start and
|
||
|
end markers that will yield a functional result, and if you make
|
||
|
a mistake with these, it is likely that your file will not
|
||
|
export or preview correctly in LilyPond.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>For a detailed, hands-on demonstration of brackets in action,
|
||
|
please see
|
||
|
<ulink url="http://rosegarden.sourceforge.net/tutorial/supplemental/fidelio/fidelio.html">this
|
||
|
online tutorial.</ulink>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="track-create-with">
|
||
|
<title>Create segments with</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These provide you with a means of controlling many of
|
||
|
the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-segmentparameterbox">segment
|
||
|
parameters</link> for segments that don't yet
|
||
|
exist. They are aimed especially at notation users,
|
||
|
and they facilitate operations that require you to use
|
||
|
more than one segment on a track (as when using
|
||
|
<!-- link -->repeats, or <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-lilypond-directives">alternative
|
||
|
endings</link>), by allowing you to create a series of new
|
||
|
segments that all have the same properties by default.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Preset</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The <guimenuitem>Load</guimenuitem> button
|
||
|
launches a dialog that allows you to pick
|
||
|
a pre-defined collection of parameters
|
||
|
that provide guidelines for how you should
|
||
|
write parts for real-world instruments, and
|
||
|
optionally convert any existing segments on this
|
||
|
track to take on these new parameters.
|
||
|
<!-- needs a tutorial somewhere, and a link to
|
||
|
that tutorial DMM -->
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-loadpreset.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You first pick a Category, then an Instrument,
|
||
|
and finally choose whether you wish to write a
|
||
|
part for an amateur or a professional player.
|
||
|
<footnote><para>This database was compiled by
|
||
|
Magnus Johansson, who deserves all the special
|
||
|
mention we can muster for his outstanding effort
|
||
|
on this.</para></footnote> The Scope controls
|
||
|
allow you to choose whether these parameters
|
||
|
will only affect segments that don't yet exist
|
||
|
(which you will subsequently record, or draw
|
||
|
with the pencil) or should convert any existing
|
||
|
segments to take these parameters as well. (For
|
||
|
a demonstration of the latter case in action,
|
||
|
please see
|
||
|
<ulink url="http://rosegarden.sourceforge.net/tutorial/supplemental/fidelio/fidelio.html">
|
||
|
this online tutorial.)</ulink>
|
||
|
Clicking the <guimenuitem>OK</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
button injects the appropriate parameters into
|
||
|
the remaining widgets in this part of the track
|
||
|
parameters box, where you can tweak them if you
|
||
|
desire.<footnote><para>No facility is provided
|
||
|
at this time for assembling your own database of
|
||
|
presets, or customizing the existing ones in a
|
||
|
permanent way.</para></footnote> </para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Once you have loaded a preset, the name of
|
||
|
your chosen preset will be used as the label
|
||
|
for any segments you subsequently draw or
|
||
|
record on this track, even if you change some
|
||
|
or all of the associated parameters away from
|
||
|
the values you just loaded.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Clef</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>This lets you choose the clef for any
|
||
|
segments you subsequently draw or record on
|
||
|
this track. Clefs are events, not properties.
|
||
|
Your segments will be created with an initial
|
||
|
clef event of the appropriate type (which you
|
||
|
may subsequently alter or delete, should you
|
||
|
have some occasion to do so.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The clefs available include a variety of named
|
||
|
clefs representing standard clefs with various
|
||
|
octave offsets.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<!-- !!! I would enumerate this list, but I have
|
||
|
no idea how to do it in docbook. I'm just winging
|
||
|
it by the seat of my pants here. Why do you think
|
||
|
I avoided touching this hateful mess until now? I
|
||
|
wrote Rosegarden Companion using OO.o, and didn't
|
||
|
touch tag one. Wah. -->
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Transpose</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This causes segments on this track to be
|
||
|
created so that their note events sound at a
|
||
|
given transposition. Useful, especially, for
|
||
|
writing parts for transposing instruments.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Colour</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This causes segments on this track to be
|
||
|
created using a given colour.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Range</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The <guimenuitem>Low:</guimenuitem> and
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>High:</guimenuitem> buttons,
|
||
|
launch a dialog that allows you to pick a
|
||
|
pitch using a staff. The lowest and highest pitches
|
||
|
you select will then appear right on these
|
||
|
buttons.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These represent the lowest and highest
|
||
|
playable notes, respectively, on the instrument for which you
|
||
|
are writing notation. In some cases, these
|
||
|
limits will be hard and fast, like the low B
|
||
|
on a Transverse Flute (B foot). In others,
|
||
|
they may only serve as guidelines to help you
|
||
|
make good choices for instruments with which
|
||
|
you are not intimately familiar.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you enter, record, or import data that has
|
||
|
pitches exceeding the values specified, the
|
||
|
note heads will appear in red by default. You
|
||
|
can turn this behavior off with
|
||
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
|
||
|
Rosegarden</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Notation</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Show
|
||
|
notes outside playable range in
|
||
|
red</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-segmentparameterbox">
|
||
|
<title>The Segment Parameter Box</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-segmentparameterbox.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s segment parameter box</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The segment parameter box can be found at the left side of the Rosegarden main window. (If you can't see it, try using <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Special Parameters</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.)
|
||
|
It allows you to modify some aspects of the
|
||
|
selected segments.</para><para>If a single segment is currently selected, its
|
||
|
parameters will be shown in the segment parameter box and can be
|
||
|
edited there. If several segments are selected, the parameter box
|
||
|
will only show the current values where they are the same for all
|
||
|
of the selected segments -- but you can still edit them, and your
|
||
|
changes will apply to the whole selection.
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Label</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Shows the label of the selected segment (or segments, if
|
||
|
they all have the same label). Click the "Edit" button to edit
|
||
|
the label.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Repeat</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Switches repeat on or off for the selected segments. A
|
||
|
repeating segment will repeat until the start of the following
|
||
|
segment on the same track, or until the end of the composition
|
||
|
if there is no following segment.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The repeated parts of a repeating segment are shown on
|
||
|
the main canvas in a fainter colour than the original segment.
|
||
|
You can turn them into real editable copies of the original
|
||
|
segment either by using
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Turn Repeats into Copies</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>, or simply by double-clicking on the
|
||
|
individual repeating blocks.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Quantize</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Shows the quantization setting for the selected
|
||
|
segments. You can change this to quickly quantize
|
||
|
the start times of all their notes. For more
|
||
|
advanced quantization, use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Quantize...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>. See <link
|
||
|
linkend="quantization">Quantization</link> for more
|
||
|
details.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Transpose</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Shows the transposition (in semitones) currently applied
|
||
|
to the selected segments. This transposition is applied when
|
||
|
the segment is played, and is not shown in the notes displayed
|
||
|
in the matrix, notation or event list editors. You can use
|
||
|
this to quickly change the pitch of part or all of a
|
||
|
composition, and it is commonly used with segments containing
|
||
|
notation written for transposing instruments, such as the
|
||
|
clarinet.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Delay</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Shows the delay currently in effect on the selected
|
||
|
segments. You can set a delay here in order to cause an entire
|
||
|
segment to play later than written. This delay is applied when
|
||
|
the segment is played, and is not shown in the notes displayed
|
||
|
in the matrix, notation or event list editors.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can set a delay either in musical time (by
|
||
|
choosing a note duration from the delay dropdown),
|
||
|
in which time the exact delay will depend on the
|
||
|
tempo, or in real time (by choosing a time in
|
||
|
milliseconds from the dropdown).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Colour</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Shows the colour being used for the display of the
|
||
|
selected segments. You can choose another colour from the
|
||
|
dropdown, or choose the "Add New Colour" option if you want a
|
||
|
colour not in the dropdown.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can also manage and rename colours using
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Composition</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Edit Document Properties...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
(then choose the Colour page on the document properties
|
||
|
dialog). The modified colour palette will be saved
|
||
|
with the composition in the Rosegarden file.
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-colours.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s colour manager</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox">
|
||
|
<title>The Instrument Parameter Box</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The instrument parameter box can be found at the left side of
|
||
|
the Rosegarden main window, near the <link
|
||
|
linkend="segment-view-segmentparameterbox">Segment Parameter
|
||
|
Box</link>. (If you can't see it, try using
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Special
|
||
|
Parameters</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.)</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It shows you
|
||
|
which instrument is assigned to the current selected track,
|
||
|
and contains all of the editable controls for that instrument.
|
||
|
Remember that because any number of tracks can be assigned to
|
||
|
the same instrument, the settings in this box may affect more
|
||
|
than one track at a time.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The layout and contents of the instrument
|
||
|
parameter box depend on the type of instrument: MIDI, audio,
|
||
|
or synth plugin.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-midi">
|
||
|
<title>MIDI Instrument Parameters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-ipb-midi.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s instrument parameter box for a MIDI instrument</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>When you select a track assigned to a MIDI instrument,
|
||
|
the instrument parameter box shows MIDI parameters.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>At the top, this box
|
||
|
shows the name of the instrument and the connection that its
|
||
|
device is using.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Below that, you can see and edit the MIDI
|
||
|
channel number and the <link linkend="studio-bank-editor">bank
|
||
|
and program</link> settings that should be sent to the
|
||
|
instrument at the start of playback (including a "percussion"
|
||
|
toggle that controls whether only percussion programs should
|
||
|
be offered in these settings).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Finally this box shows you the <!-- !!! link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-device-controllers" --> controllers available
|
||
|
for this device (those for a General MIDI device are shown
|
||
|
above). Any settings you make here will be sent to this
|
||
|
instrument's channel at the start of playback.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-audio">
|
||
|
<title>Audio Instrument Parameters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-ipb-audio.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s instrument parameter box for an audio instrument</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
When you select an audio track, the instrument parameter
|
||
|
box shows audio parameters.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The box has two main faders, one with a blue surround for
|
||
|
playback level and the other with a red surround for the
|
||
|
record level when recording to this instrument. Between
|
||
|
them is a playback level meter.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The two menus at the top of the box are used to select
|
||
|
the input and output <link linkend="studio-audio-routing">audio routing</link> for this
|
||
|
instrument. Below them you can select whether the instrument
|
||
|
is mono or stereo, and the pan setting for position in the
|
||
|
stereo field. (Audio instruments are always ultimately
|
||
|
stereo, because the pan setting is always applied. But if you
|
||
|
set the instrument to mono, it will reduce any audio data and
|
||
|
effect outputs to mono before applying pan.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The column of five buttons at lower left are the effects
|
||
|
slots. Click on them to select and activate plugin effects
|
||
|
for this audio instrument, and to control them using the <link linkend="studio-plugins">plugin editor dialog</link>. These are insert effects,
|
||
|
applied in order from top to bottom before the fader and pan.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="segment-view-instrumentparameterbox-synth">
|
||
|
<title>Synth Plugin Instrument Parameters</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-ipb-synth.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s instrument parameter box for a synth plugin instrument</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>When you select a track assigned to a synth plugin
|
||
|
instrument, the instrument parameter box shows synth
|
||
|
parameters. You will notice that although a synth plugin
|
||
|
track uses segments with MIDI data in them, in terms of
|
||
|
control and routing it behaves more like an audio track.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The most important control here is the button at top
|
||
|
left (saying Xsynth in the above picture) which shows the name
|
||
|
of the synth plugin in use for this instrument. Click this to
|
||
|
select a particular synth and control it in the standard
|
||
|
Rosegarden <link linkend="studio-plugins">plugin editor dialog</link>. Once
|
||
|
you've selected a plugin, you may also be able to click the
|
||
|
Editor button below it in order to open a dedicated GUI editor
|
||
|
for the particular plugin (if the plugin has one).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The remaining controls here are the same as for audio
|
||
|
instruments: the playback fader, playback level, output
|
||
|
routing, mono/stereo and pan settings and effects slots are
|
||
|
all exactly the same.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="quantization">
|
||
|
<title>Quantization</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
"Quantization" is the process of repositioning notes and other
|
||
|
events so that they start or finish on exact beat divisions. It
|
||
|
is traditionally used to make an approximate performance into a
|
||
|
precise but rather mechanical-sounding one -- either because
|
||
|
precision is the desired effect, or for reasons such as making
|
||
|
the notes clearer in notation.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For general quantization, use
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Segments</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Quantize</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
in the main window or
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Quantize</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
in matrix or notation editors. This shows you a dialog in which
|
||
|
you can select the precise quantization parameters you need, and
|
||
|
then it applies these to all of the selected segments or notes.
|
||
|
(You can also quickly reach this dialog by pressing the "="
|
||
|
key.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-gridquantizer.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s quantize dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The quantize dialog offers a selection of quantizers, each with
|
||
|
its own set of parameters. The quantizers available are:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Grid quantizer</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The grid quantizer moves the start times of notes so
|
||
|
that they start at the nearest point on some grid (defined
|
||
|
by various parameters of the quantizer). Thus notes that
|
||
|
initially vary slightly in start time will be aligned by the
|
||
|
quantizer, making for a more precise and mechanical
|
||
|
performance.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Legato quantizer</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The legato quantizer carries out a simple grid
|
||
|
quantization, and also adjusts the note durations so as to
|
||
|
remove any gaps between notes by extending each note so as
|
||
|
to (at least) continue until the start of the following one.
|
||
|
You can also obtain this legato effect without the
|
||
|
accompanying grid quantization using the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Quantize</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Legato</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function in the Matrix editor.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Heuristic notation quantizer</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The notation quantizer attempts to adjust note start
|
||
|
times and durations so as to produce readable notation. See
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-quantization">Notation from performance
|
||
|
data</link> for a description of this quantizer and its
|
||
|
uses.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The grid quantizer has the following adjustable parameters:</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Base grid unit</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>This is the size of the grid used for quantization.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Swing</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>This is a percentage figure which adjusts the degree
|
||
|
by which alternate beats are quantized "late".</para>
|
||
|
<para>If set to
|
||
|
None (the default), quantization will be to an even grid
|
||
|
spaced according to the base grid unit.</para>
|
||
|
<para>If set to 100%,
|
||
|
every second grid line will be placed two-thirds of the distance
|
||
|
between the previous and next ones, instead of only half.
|
||
|
This will result in notes being quantized to the first and
|
||
|
third triplets of a swing beat.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Other settings will produce proportionately varying degrees of
|
||
|
swinginess. You can also set this parameter to negative
|
||
|
figures (for alternate beats to start early) or to figures
|
||
|
greater than 100%.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Iterative amount</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The default behaviour of the grid quantizer is to move
|
||
|
each note exactly onto its nearest grid line. But if you
|
||
|
set the iterative amount to something less than 100% (the
|
||
|
"Full quantize" default), each note will only be moved that
|
||
|
percentage of the distance toward its nearest grid line,
|
||
|
resulting in a nearly-but-not-quite quantized effect.</para>
|
||
|
<para>This quantizer may be applied repeatedly so as to try
|
||
|
out gradually increasing degrees of quantization, hence the
|
||
|
name "iterative". Use
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Quantize</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Repeat Last Quantize</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> in the Matrix editor to do so.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Quantize durations as well as start times</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>If this option is enabled, the quantizer will quantize
|
||
|
the notes' end times to the same grid as their start times.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The quantize dialog also has an optional Advanced section
|
||
|
containing further options for
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-quantization">notation quantization</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Another simple way to apply a grid quantizer is to do it in the
|
||
|
main window, using the <guimenuitem>Quantize</guimenuitem> menu
|
||
|
on the <link linkend="segment-view-segmentparameterbox">Segment
|
||
|
Parameter Box</link>. If you select some segments and change
|
||
|
the value shown in the menu, the segments will immediately be
|
||
|
grid-quantized to the resolution shown in the menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Finally, there is also a <link
|
||
|
linkend="matrix-grid-quantize">quantize control</link> in the matrix
|
||
|
view.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="matrix-view">
|
||
|
<title>The Matrix editor</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The &rosegarden; matrix editor enables you to view and edit
|
||
|
music in a simple, logical format: each note represented as a
|
||
|
block in a grid, at a height corresponding to the pitch.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-matrixview.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s matrix editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
Each matrix editor window shows a single segment. To edit a
|
||
|
segment, just right-click on it in the main canvas and select
|
||
|
the matrix editor from the menu. Alternatively, you can
|
||
|
configure Rosegarden to make the matrix editor the default
|
||
|
editor available when you double-click on a segment.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="matrix-grid-quantize">
|
||
|
<title>The Grid and Quantize controls</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The matrix view contains Grid and Quantize menus in its main
|
||
|
toolbar.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The Grid menu controls the size of the visible grid in the
|
||
|
background of the matrix view, as well as the time resolution
|
||
|
used when entering and moving notes. After you set it to a
|
||
|
particular time value, the normal note insertion and drag
|
||
|
operations will then snap automatically to grid points spaced at
|
||
|
that time width. You can override the snap-to-grid effect
|
||
|
temporarily by holding down Shift during editing, or you can
|
||
|
disable it by setting the Grid menu to None.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The Quantize menu works rather differently. Rather than
|
||
|
controlling the behaviour of other editing tools, it actually
|
||
|
performs an action. When you change the value in this menu, the
|
||
|
selected notes -- or the whole segment if nothing is selected
|
||
|
-- will immediately be quantized using a grid quantizer of the
|
||
|
chosen resolution.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The Quantize menu also shows you continuously what
|
||
|
resolution the current segment or selection is quantized to.
|
||
|
For example, if you select a set of notes that start on
|
||
|
consecutive quarter-note beats, the Quantize menu will update
|
||
|
itself to show 1/4, as this is the coarsest resolution
|
||
|
consistent with the existing quantization of the current
|
||
|
selection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="matrix-insertion">
|
||
|
<title>Inserting notes</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The simplest way to enter a note in the matrix view is to
|
||
|
use the mouse. To do this, select the pencil tool on the
|
||
|
toolbar, and then click and drag on the matrix editor. The
|
||
|
note will be entered at the time and pitch corresponding to
|
||
|
the point you click at, and will have a duration
|
||
|
corresponding to the distance you drag before releasing the
|
||
|
mouse button.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also draw notes using the Select tool (the
|
||
|
arrow), by clicking and dragging either with the middle mouse
|
||
|
button, or with the left mouse button and Ctrl pressed.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>By default, the time and duration are snapped to a
|
||
|
particular grid unit, according to the Grid setting on the
|
||
|
View menu or the toolbar. You can prevent this effect by
|
||
|
holding down Shift while clicking and dragging.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="matrix-insertion-keyboard">
|
||
|
<title>Typing notes with the PC keyboard</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Duration</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The durations of notes entered from the keyboard are
|
||
|
controlled by the Grid setting on the View menu or
|
||
|
toolbar. You can set this using the number keys:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>5</keycap> – Whole bar</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>1</keycap> – Beat</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>2</keycap> – Half note (minim)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>4</keycap> – Quarter note (crotchet)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>8</keycap> – Eighth note (quaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>6</keycap> – Sixteenth note (semiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>3</keycap> – Thirty-second note (demisemiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>0</keycap> – Sixty-fourth note (hemidemisemiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Pitch</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Once the correct duration is selected in the Grid
|
||
|
menu, you can insert a note at the current position of the
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-rulers">insert cursor</link> by pressing
|
||
|
one of the pitch keys:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>A</keycap> – Do (the tonic of the current key in the current clef)<!-- !!! FIXME: no clef in matrix view --></para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>S</keycap> – Re</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>D</keycap> – Mi</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>F</keycap> – Fa</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>J</keycap> – So</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>K</keycap> – La</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>L</keycap> – Ti</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Holding <keycap>Shift</keycap> while pressing a key
|
||
|
will sharpen the note (except for Mi and Ti, which don't
|
||
|
have sharpened versions) and holding <keycap>Shift</keycap>
|
||
|
and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> together will flatten it (except
|
||
|
for Fa and Do).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To enter notes an octave higher, use the corresponding
|
||
|
keys on the next row up: <keycap>Q</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>W</keycap>, <keycap>E</keycap>, <keycap>R</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>U</keycap>, <keycap>I</keycap>, and
|
||
|
<keycap>O</keycap>. Likewise to enter notes an octave
|
||
|
lower, use <keycap>Z</keycap>, <keycap>X</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>C</keycap>, <keycap>V</keycap>, <keycap>B</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>N</keycap> and <keycap>M</keycap>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Other remarks</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>All of the insertion commands are also available on a
|
||
|
submenu of the Tools menu. It's unlikely you'd ever want to
|
||
|
navigate the menus just to insert a single note, but the
|
||
|
menus show the keyboard shortcuts and so provide a useful
|
||
|
reference in case you forget which key is which.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The keyboard shortcuts are currently designed for use
|
||
|
with a QWERTY-layout keyboard. There is not yet any way to
|
||
|
remap the keys for another layout, short of reassigning each
|
||
|
key individually using <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Configure Shortcuts...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="matrix-insertion-midi">
|
||
|
<title>Entering notes using a MIDI keyboard</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can enter notes into the matrix editor one at a time
|
||
|
using a MIDI keyboard or other MIDI control device. The
|
||
|
matrix editor uses the pitches you play on the keyboard,
|
||
|
but the durations you have selected in the Grid setting of
|
||
|
the editor itself. This is known as "step recording".
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To start entering notes from a MIDI keyboard, first make
|
||
|
sure the keyboard is configured as a MIDI
|
||
|
record device. Then make sure you have the right Grid
|
||
|
setting in the View menu or toolbar, as this controls the
|
||
|
note duration. Then press the <!-- !!! image of button
|
||
|
--> step recording button on the matrix editor's toolbar,
|
||
|
or select Step Recording from the Tools menu. From that
|
||
|
point on all notes pressed on the MIDI keyboard will be
|
||
|
inserted at the current insertion time in that window,
|
||
|
until step recording is switched off again or activated in
|
||
|
a different window or the window is closed.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can change the Grid setting while step recording is in
|
||
|
progress, in order to insert notes of different durations.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="matrix-selection">
|
||
|
<title>Selecting notes</title> <para>To select notes in the
|
||
|
matrix editor, switch to the Select (arrow) tool and then
|
||
|
outline a rectangular area containing the notes you want to
|
||
|
select. The selected events will then be highlighted in blue.
|
||
|
If you instead click on a single event, just that event will
|
||
|
be selected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para><para>If you hold <keycap>Shift</keycap> while dragging
|
||
|
out a rectangle or clicking on a note, the new selection will
|
||
|
be added to any existing selection instead of replacing it.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To clear a selection, click in an empty space on the matrix
|
||
|
editor, or hit the Escape key.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also select all of the notes of a given pitch,
|
||
|
by shift-clicking on a key in the piano keyboard down the left
|
||
|
side of the matrix editor. You can also shift-click and drag
|
||
|
to select a range of pitches. This selection is added to any
|
||
|
existing selection you have, so if you want a clean new
|
||
|
selection, clear the old one first.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="matrix-selectionfilter">
|
||
|
<title>Filtering the selection</title>
|
||
|
<para>The <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Filter Selection</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function offers you the ability to filter a range of events in
|
||
|
any of several categories out of your selection. You can use this to refine the selection, if you want some action to apply to only certain events in it.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-eventfilter.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The event filter dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
All ranges may be either inclusive or exclusive.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
An inclusive range will remove events on either side of it
|
||
|
from the selection. You can use this, for example, to
|
||
|
filter everything below middle C and above the A above
|
||
|
middle C out of your selection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
An exclusive range will remove the events within the range
|
||
|
itself, leaving everything on either side of it selected.
|
||
|
Using the same search points as in the previous example,
|
||
|
you would use an exclusive range to remove everything
|
||
|
between middle C and the A above middle C from your
|
||
|
selection, while leaving everything above and below that
|
||
|
range selected.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Once your selection has been filtered, you can manipulate
|
||
|
it by any conventional means.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="matrix-editing">
|
||
|
<title>Moving and copying notes</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can move notes in both time and pitch on the matrix
|
||
|
editor by either clicking and dragging them with the Move
|
||
|
tool, or selecting them and then dragging them with the
|
||
|
Select tool.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To copy notes, select them and then use the standard copy
|
||
|
and paste functions. After the paste the pasted notes will
|
||
|
be selected instead, and you can then drag them wherever you
|
||
|
need them. You may also copy notes by selecting them with
|
||
|
the Select tool, then keeping Ctrl pressed click-and-drag
|
||
|
the selected notes in a new position.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="percussion-matrix-view">
|
||
|
<title>The Percussion Matrix editor</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The Percussion Matrix editor is identical to the <link
|
||
|
linkend="matrix-view">Matrix editor</link>, except that it shows
|
||
|
pitch names on the vertical scale instead of a piano keyboard, and
|
||
|
it does not show the duration for each note. This is intended for
|
||
|
use with percussion programs on MIDI instruments, in which each
|
||
|
note pitch plays a different percussion sound.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-percussionmatrix.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s percussion matrix editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
The pitch names are only shown if the segment being edited is
|
||
|
playing through a percussion instrument that has an associated
|
||
|
key mapping to define the names; otherwise the standard matrix
|
||
|
view piano keyboard will appear instead. See <link
|
||
|
linkend="studio-keymappings">Percussion Key Mappings</link> for
|
||
|
more information about key mappings.</para>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="notation-view">
|
||
|
<title>The Notation editor</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Introduction, purpose -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-introduction">
|
||
|
<title>Introduction</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The &rosegarden; notation editor enables you to view and edit
|
||
|
one or more staffs in traditional score notation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para><para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-notationview.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s notation editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; aims to present scores with the best possible
|
||
|
layout compatible with its primary focus as a sequencer
|
||
|
application. This means that although the editor supports
|
||
|
chords, overlapping and nested beamed groups, triplets and
|
||
|
arbitrary tuplets, grace notes, dynamics, accents, text and so
|
||
|
on, it does not provide as much fine control over layout
|
||
|
(especially in contrapuntal music) as a dedicated score
|
||
|
editing program might. &rosegarden; does not aim to produce
|
||
|
typeset-quality score, although it can export LilyPond files,
|
||
|
which may form a good basis for typesetting.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Single and multiple staffs, and "current staff" -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-staffs">
|
||
|
<title>Single and multiple staffs</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
There are three ways to open a notation editor from the
|
||
|
&rosegarden; main window. (They all require that you
|
||
|
have some existing segments in the main window first,
|
||
|
so if you're starting a new composition, you should
|
||
|
create your segments before you start thinking about
|
||
|
how to edit them.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Double-clicking on segments</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The most obvious way is just to double-click on
|
||
|
a segment in the main canvas. This opens the segment
|
||
|
in whatever you have configured <!-- !!!Link --> as
|
||
|
the default editor (notation, matrix, or event list),
|
||
|
and by default this is the notation editor. So
|
||
|
double-clicking a single segment will open it as a
|
||
|
single staff in a Notation editor window.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also open a multi-staff editor this way:
|
||
|
holding down the Shift key, select (with a single
|
||
|
mouse click) each of the segments on the main view
|
||
|
that you want to open, but double-click on the last
|
||
|
one. All of the selected segments will then be opened
|
||
|
together in a single notation window.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>The Open in Default Editor menu function (the Return key)</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The Return key is a shortcut for the Open in
|
||
|
Default Editor menu function, which does much the same
|
||
|
thing as double-clicking: opens all of the currently
|
||
|
selected segments together in a notation editor, or in
|
||
|
whichever other editor you have configured as your
|
||
|
default. </para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>The Open in Notation Editor menu functions</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Alternatively, you can use the main window's
|
||
|
Open in
|
||
|
Notation Editor menu function, either on
|
||
|
the Segments menu or on the right-button popup menu on
|
||
|
a segment in the canvas. Select the segments you want
|
||
|
to edit (by shift-clicking as above, or by using the
|
||
|
Select All Segments function) and
|
||
|
then select Open in
|
||
|
Notation Editor.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you have more than one staff (i.e. segment) visible in the notation
|
||
|
editor, only one of them can be "current" at once. The
|
||
|
current staff can be distinguished because it has the insert
|
||
|
cursor on it (see <link linkend="nv-rulers">Rulers and
|
||
|
Cursors</link>), and this is the staff on which any editing
|
||
|
operations that use the insert cursor will take place. The
|
||
|
topmost staff is the current one by default, but you can
|
||
|
switch to a different staff by ctrl-clicking on it, or by using the
|
||
|
<menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Local
|
||
|
Cursor</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Cursor Up Staff</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
|
||
|
<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Cursor Down Staff</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu functions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Linear and page layouts -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-layout">
|
||
|
<title>Linear and page layouts</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The usual way the notation editor displays staffs is known
|
||
|
as Linear layout: one staff on top of another, with each
|
||
|
staff as a single, horizontally scrollable long line. Some
|
||
|
of the functions of the editor (such as the <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-rulers">Rulers</link>) are only available in
|
||
|
Linear layout.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
However, you can also display staffs in two different
|
||
|
page-based layouts: Continuous Page and Multiple Page.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>In Continuous Page layout, the music is arranged in one
|
||
|
infinitely-tall page of the same width as the window. Each
|
||
|
staff breaks at the end of a line, starting a new line below
|
||
|
the remaining staffs.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>In Multiple Page layout, the music is divided up into
|
||
|
real pages much as it will be when printed. The size of each
|
||
|
page is calculated so that approximately the same amount of
|
||
|
music will fit on each line as it will when actually printed
|
||
|
(according to the point size specified for the printing
|
||
|
resolution in the configuration dialog). The printed version
|
||
|
is unlikely to be exactly the same, as it depends on the
|
||
|
precise paper size and margins in use when printing, but it
|
||
|
should be fairly close if you happen to be using A4
|
||
|
paper.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-notationview-multipage.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s notation editor in Multiple Page layout</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para><para>
|
||
|
Most, but not all, of the display and editing functions
|
||
|
work in the page layout modes as well as in linear layout.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To switch between these layout modes, use the Linear Layout, Continuous Page Layout and Multiple Page Layout menu functions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Rulers and Cursors -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-rulers">
|
||
|
<title>Rulers and cursors</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The &rosegarden; Notation editor window includes two graduated rulers,
|
||
|
each associated with its own cursor. The rulers are the horizontal strips
|
||
|
divided up with tickmarks at top and bottom of the main
|
||
|
notation canvas, and the cursors are the coloured vertical
|
||
|
lines shown initially at the start of the top staff in the
|
||
|
editor. In addition to these main two, there are the <guimenuitem>chord
|
||
|
name</guimenuitem> ruler, the <guimenuitem>tempo</guimenuitem> ruler,
|
||
|
and the <guimenuitem>raw note</guimenuitem> ruler.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Note that the rulers are only shown in <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-layout">Linear layout</link> mode, and several of them
|
||
|
are not displayed by default.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-cursors.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The notation editor's two cursors</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The purple cursor is the insert cursor. It shows the point
|
||
|
at which operations such as insert and paste will take
|
||
|
place. You can reposition the insert cursor by clicking or
|
||
|
dragging on the top ruler, or by clicking with the Select
|
||
|
tool on an empty part of the staff (avoiding any events), or
|
||
|
by clicking anywhere with <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> held down.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also use the left and right arrow keys to move
|
||
|
the insert cursor one event at a time. If you hold <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> while
|
||
|
pressing the arrow keys, the cursor will move a whole bar at a
|
||
|
time; if you hold Shift, the cursor will <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-tools-selections">select the events</link> as it
|
||
|
passes over them.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The blue cursor is the playback pointer. Just like the
|
||
|
similar cursors in the main window and the matrix views,
|
||
|
this shows the location of the current playback or record
|
||
|
position, and it sweeps across the notation while the transport is
|
||
|
rolling. It can be repositioned using the bottom ruler.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-raw-note-ruler">
|
||
|
<title>The raw note ruler</title>
|
||
|
<para>The raw note ruler is particularly
|
||
|
useful when editing <link linkend="nv-quantization">quantized
|
||
|
notation</link> where the display duration on the page
|
||
|
differs from the duration of the actual performance.
|
||
|
Enabled via
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Rulers</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Raw Note Ruler</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>, it draws a small bar above
|
||
|
each note, similar to the way notes appear in the matrix. In this
|
||
|
example screenshot, you can see how interpreted, quantized notes
|
||
|
appear on this ruler. The tenuto notes have full performance
|
||
|
durations, while the staccato notes are considerably shorter, and
|
||
|
the accented notes have a higher velocity (more red colour) than
|
||
|
their neighbors.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Raw note ruler marks only notes in the selected segment in the track.
|
||
|
The colour of the selected segment is used in the background of
|
||
|
the raw note ruler between the start and end time of the segment.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata
|
||
|
fileref="rg-rawnoteruler.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The raw note ruler,
|
||
|
showing notation whose performance duration value differs
|
||
|
from what appears on the staff</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-chord-name-ruler">
|
||
|
<title>The chord name ruler</title>
|
||
|
<para>The chord name ruler analyzes the tonality of the piece, and
|
||
|
attempts to display which chords are sounding. This is for
|
||
|
informational purposes only, and you can neither print nor edit the
|
||
|
contents of this ruler.
|
||
|
<!-- !!! throw in a link to how to do proper chords with text, and
|
||
|
should probably get into fretboards too, but I'm not going to mention
|
||
|
fretboards in this manual at this time (for 1.3) because it's too
|
||
|
rough, and I just don't care to get into that yet -->
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-tempo-ruler">
|
||
|
<title>The tempo ruler</title> <para>The tempo ruler displays
|
||
|
the global tempo, and provides a vehicle for entering,
|
||
|
editing, and manipulating it. It works the same way as the
|
||
|
tempo rulers in the main window and the matrix editor. See
|
||
|
<link linkend="tempo-ruler">Tempo Rulers</link> for more
|
||
|
information.</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Display conventions (annotated picture with some selected notes,
|
||
|
some quantized notes, a bar of incorrect length etc) -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Tools and Selections -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-tools-selections">
|
||
|
<title>Tools and selections</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Most of the menu and toolbar editing functions in the
|
||
|
&rosegarden; Notation editor fall into one of three
|
||
|
categories: <quote>tools</quote>, <quote>functions that
|
||
|
operate on selections</quote>, and <quote>drag
|
||
|
operations</quote>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Tools</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The basic tools are the selection tool, the erase
|
||
|
tool, and those for inserting notes, rests, text and so
|
||
|
on, which are usually accessed from the toolbar buttons.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata
|
||
|
fileref="rg-notationtools.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The insert, erase, text, and guitar chord tools</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Choosing a tool changes the default behaviour of the
|
||
|
mouse buttons on the main notation canvas, at least
|
||
|
until another tool is chosen instead. For example,
|
||
|
choosing the selection tool allows you to make
|
||
|
selections and so to use the selection-based functions
|
||
|
(below); choosing an insertion tool (such as one of the
|
||
|
notes) switches the <acronym>GUI</acronym>'s behaviour so as to insert
|
||
|
notes by clicking on the canvas; choosing the erase tool
|
||
|
allows you to remove events by clicking on them.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can also change the current tool using the Tools menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Functions that operate on selections</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The majority of the remaining menu functions require a
|
||
|
selection to be made on the canvas before they can be
|
||
|
used. Some of them (such as <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
or the <guimenuitem>Note Style</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
functions) will operate on any selected events; others
|
||
|
(<guimenuitem>Stem Directions</guimenuitem> function)
|
||
|
will refuse to work unless the selection contains
|
||
|
some notes.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To select some events on the canvas, switch to the
|
||
|
Select (arrow) tool and then outline a rectangular area
|
||
|
containing the events you want to select. The selected
|
||
|
events will then be highlighted in blue. If you click
|
||
|
on a single event, just that event will be selected <footnote>
|
||
|
<para> You can also double-click on a single event to open an
|
||
|
editing dialog for that event, but that's got nothing to
|
||
|
do with selections.</para> </footnote>).
|
||
|
</para><para>If you hold
|
||
|
<keycap>Shift</keycap> while dragging
|
||
|
out a rectangle, its contents will be added to any
|
||
|
existing selection instead of replacing it.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To select a whole bar, double-click with the Select tool
|
||
|
on some empty space within that bar; to select the whole
|
||
|
staff, click three times. The Edit menu carries
|
||
|
functions for selecting extended areas based on the
|
||
|
location of the insert cursor, and you can also select
|
||
|
events around the insert cursor by holding Shift and
|
||
|
pressing the left or right arrow keys.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
It is not possible to select events from more than
|
||
|
one staff at once.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>After selecting some events, you can filter your selection further using the <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Filter Selection</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice> function. For more details, refer to <link linkend="matrix-selectionfilter">the corresponding function in the matrix editor</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Drag operations</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can also do a certain amount of editing just by
|
||
|
dragging things around. Switch to the Select (arrow)
|
||
|
tool, and then you can change the pitch of notes by
|
||
|
just click-and-dragging their heads up or down, and
|
||
|
change the times of notes and other events by dragging
|
||
|
them left or right. (You can't drag rests or time
|
||
|
signatures, but you can drag everything else. If you
|
||
|
have more than one event selected, the whole selection
|
||
|
will be dragged at once.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Dragging is usually a less accurate way of editing
|
||
|
things than using the menu or toolbar functions, but
|
||
|
it can be easier.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2>
|
||
|
<title>Transposing</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="transpose-by-interval.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>Transposing by interval</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
In Notation view menu there are two functions which can be
|
||
|
used to transpose notes by an arbitrary interval, namely
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Transpose</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Transpose by Semitones</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function which asks just the number of semitones to be
|
||
|
transposed, and
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Transpose</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Transpose by Interval</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function which shows a neat dialog that can be used to
|
||
|
transpose notes. In the latter, the dialog shows an example
|
||
|
notes before and after transposing and expresses the
|
||
|
interval in written form. The interval may be changed either
|
||
|
by dragging the notes shown by the dialog or by changing
|
||
|
separately the base note, its octavation and accidentals.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
In Segment view, Notation view, and Track view there is also
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">Segment(s)</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Transpose by Interval</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function which makes a transpose to entire segment. In this
|
||
|
dialog you may also choose whether only the notes are
|
||
|
transposed or the keys of the segment are transposed also.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Insertion: notes, auto-ties, accidentals -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-insertion">
|
||
|
<title>Inserting notes and rests</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To insert a note, select one of the note tools by clicking
|
||
|
on a particular duration of note on the toolbar, and then click
|
||
|
on the staff at the point where you want to add the note.</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata
|
||
|
fileref="rg-notation-toolbars.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>The duration, rests, and accidentals toolbars</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also select one of the accidentals on the toolbar
|
||
|
to insert sharpened or flattened notes. If no accidental is
|
||
|
selected, the note inserted will follow the key signature.
|
||
|
Alternatively, you can select the "Follow previous accidental"
|
||
|
icon (shown as a note with an arrow pointing back from where the
|
||
|
accidental would appear) to make the note follow whatever
|
||
|
accidental was last used at the same height on the staff.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you add a note at the same time as an existing note of
|
||
|
different duration, the editor will generally assume that you
|
||
|
want to create chords and will split the existing or new note
|
||
|
accordingly so as to create one or more chords with ties. If
|
||
|
you really do want to chord two different durations, you can
|
||
|
select the tied noteheads and use the Collapse Equal-Pitch Notes
|
||
|
function to merge them together. Alternatively, the default
|
||
|
behaviour can be changed in the &rosegarden; configuration dialog
|
||
|
so as not to do the split at all.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you add a note exactly over an existing note of
|
||
|
different duration (i.e. at the same pitch), the duration of the
|
||
|
existing note will be changed to that of the new one.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you add a rest at the same time as an existing note,
|
||
|
the note will be silenced for the duration of the rest,
|
||
|
shortening or possibly removing it altogether.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-insertion-keyboard">
|
||
|
<title>Typing notes and rests with the PC keyboard</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Duration</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>First, ensure a notation tool is selected to indicate
|
||
|
the duration of note (or rest) you wish to insert. You can
|
||
|
select the various note types using the number keys:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>5</keycap> – Breve</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>1</keycap> – Whole note (semibreve)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>2</keycap> – Half note (minim)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>4</keycap> – Quarter note (crotchet)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>8</keycap> – Eighth note (quaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>6</keycap> – Sixteenth note (semiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>3</keycap> – Thirty-second note (demisemiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>0</keycap> – Sixty-fourth note (hemidemisemiquaver)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can switch to a triplet version of the note
|
||
|
duration by pressing the <keycap>G</keycap> key. Pressing it
|
||
|
again will switch back to the normal duration. The status
|
||
|
bar at the bottom of the window will notify you of when a
|
||
|
triplet duration is active.</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Pitch</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Once a notation tool is selected, you can insert a
|
||
|
note at the current position of the <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-rulers">insert cursor</link> by pressing one of
|
||
|
the pitch keys:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>A</keycap> – Do (the tonic of the current key in the current clef)</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>S</keycap> – Re</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>D</keycap> – Mi</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>F</keycap> – Fa</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>J</keycap> – So</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>K</keycap> – La</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para><keycap>L</keycap> – Ti</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Press the "." key to togggle between dotted and
|
||
|
undotted durations.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Holding <keycap>Shift</keycap> while pressing a key
|
||
|
will sharpen the note (except for Mi and Ti, which don't
|
||
|
have sharpened versions) and holding <keycap>Shift</keycap>
|
||
|
and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> together will flatten it (except
|
||
|
for Fa and Do).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To enter notes an octave higher, use the corresponding
|
||
|
keys on the next row up: <keycap>Q</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>W</keycap>, <keycap>E</keycap>, <keycap>R</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>U</keycap>, <keycap>I</keycap>, and
|
||
|
<keycap>O</keycap>. Likewise to enter notes an octave
|
||
|
lower, use <keycap>Z</keycap>, <keycap>X</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>C</keycap>, <keycap>V</keycap>, <keycap>B</keycap>,
|
||
|
<keycap>N</keycap> and <keycap>M</keycap>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Rests</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To insert a rest instead of a note, press
|
||
|
<keycap>P</keycap>. Alternatively, you can use the
|
||
|
<keycap>T</keycap> and <keycap>Y</keycap> keys to switch the
|
||
|
current tool to a rest tool and back to a note tool again.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Chords</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The default behaviour of the notation editor is to
|
||
|
move the insert cursor forward after inserting a note, so as
|
||
|
to be ready to insert another note after it in a melody;
|
||
|
this can be changed using the <keycap>H</keycap> key, which
|
||
|
switches to chord mode so that subsequent insertions occur
|
||
|
at the same time as the last one. Pressing
|
||
|
<keycap>H</keycap> again switches back to the melody
|
||
|
insertion behaviour.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Changing note durations</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can use the keyboard to change the durations of
|
||
|
notes that you've already entered. Make sure the notes you
|
||
|
want to change are selected, and then press
|
||
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap> plus the number key for the note you
|
||
|
want. You can also add or remove dots, by pressing
|
||
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap> plus "." — use this repeatedly to
|
||
|
select between one dot, two dots and no dots.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you also hold <keycap>Alt</keycap> as well as
|
||
|
<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>, you will change the durations of the
|
||
|
notes as displayed in the notation editor without changing
|
||
|
their performed durations. This can be very useful for
|
||
|
tidying up a score: see also <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-quantization">notation from performance
|
||
|
data</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3>
|
||
|
<title>Other remarks</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>All of the insertion commands are also available on a
|
||
|
submenu of the Tools menu. It's unlikely you'd ever want to
|
||
|
navigate the menus just to insert a single note, but the
|
||
|
menus show the keyboard shortcuts and so provide a useful
|
||
|
reference in case you forget which key is which.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The keyboard shortcuts are currently designed for use
|
||
|
with a QWERTY-layout keyboard. There is not yet any way to
|
||
|
remap the keys for another layout, short of reassigning each
|
||
|
key individually using the "Configure Shortcuts..." option
|
||
|
on the Settings menu.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Holding the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key while pressing a
|
||
|
number will select the corresponding dotted-note
|
||
|
tool.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-insertion-midi">
|
||
|
<title>Entering notes using a MIDI keyboard</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can enter notes into the notation editor one at a time
|
||
|
using a MIDI keyboard or other MIDI control device — a
|
||
|
process known as step recording. The notation editor uses
|
||
|
the pitches you play on the keyboard, but the durations you
|
||
|
have selected in the editor itself.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
To start entering notes from a MIDI keyboard, first make
|
||
|
sure the keyboard is configured as your default MIDI
|
||
|
record device. Then make sure a notation tool is selected
|
||
|
to set a duration. Then press the <!-- !!! image of
|
||
|
button --> step recording button on the notation editor's
|
||
|
toolbar, or select Step Recording from the Tools menu.
|
||
|
From that point on all notes pressed on the MIDI keyboard
|
||
|
will be inserted at the current insertion time in that
|
||
|
notation window, until step recording is switched off
|
||
|
again or activated in a different window or the window is
|
||
|
closed.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can select another notation tool while step recording
|
||
|
is in progress, in order to insert notes of different
|
||
|
durations; and you can also switch into Chord mode <!--
|
||
|
!!! link --> to insert chords.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Keys, Clefs and Time Signatures -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-signatures">
|
||
|
<title>Clef and key</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- !!! rework -->
|
||
|
<para>The first thing to know about the way &rosegarden; handles
|
||
|
these is that time-related changes (tempos and time
|
||
|
signatures) are treated entirely differently from clefs and
|
||
|
keys. In order to simplify managing playback and recording as
|
||
|
well as notation, &rosegarden; requires that when the tempo or
|
||
|
time signature changes, it does so in all staffs at once. You
|
||
|
can't have one staff in 2/4 and another in 6/8 simultaneously,
|
||
|
or one staff playing at 120 to the beat and another at 90.
|
||
|
This applies only to time: there is no such restriction on the
|
||
|
use of clef and key changes. See also <link linkend="tempo">Tempo in Rosegarden</link>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To change the clef, key, tempo or time signature within a
|
||
|
notation editor window, position the <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-rulers">insert cursor</link> at the point where you
|
||
|
want the change to happen, and use one of the Edit menu's Add
|
||
|
Clef Change..., Add Key Change..., Add Tempo Change... and Add
|
||
|
Time Signature Change... functions. You will then see a dialog
|
||
|
box in which you can choose the particular clef, key, tempo or
|
||
|
time signature setting you want to apply, as follows.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-signatures-clef">
|
||
|
<title>Clef</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-clefdialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s clef dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The dialog allows you to choose a clef, but also
|
||
|
to choose how you want the clef to be applied, in
|
||
|
cases where there are already some notes following
|
||
|
the point where the clef is to be inserted. You
|
||
|
must choose one of the following:
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Maintain current pitches</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Any notes following the clef will keep
|
||
|
their current performance pitches.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For example, inserting a
|
||
|
tenor clef in the middle of a previously
|
||
|
treble-clef section will cause the notes following
|
||
|
the clef to be moved an octave
|
||
|
higher up the staff, because they will still have
|
||
|
their treble-clef pitches.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Transpose into appropriate octave</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Any notes following the clef will
|
||
|
retain their pitch within the octave, but
|
||
|
may be moved into a different octave to
|
||
|
match the new clef, and therefore will play
|
||
|
at a new pitch.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For example, inserting a tenor clef in the
|
||
|
middle of a previously treble-clef section
|
||
|
will cause the notes following the clef to
|
||
|
move by one staff line only to adjust to the new
|
||
|
clef, but to play an octave lower than before.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-signatures-key">
|
||
|
<title>Key</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-keysigdialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s key signature dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The dialog allows you to choose a key signature, but also
|
||
|
to choose how you want the key signature to be applied. You
|
||
|
must choose among the following:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Key signature</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Used to dial up the actual key signature. The dialog will
|
||
|
attempt to analyze the tonality of the piece, and guess at
|
||
|
the key signature if no key is already in effect at that
|
||
|
point in the notation.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Key transposition</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>You must choose whether to transpose the key according
|
||
|
to segment transposition, or to use the key exactly as
|
||
|
specified.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For example, if you are inserting a key of Bb major into a
|
||
|
transposed Bb trumpet part that's sounding at a
|
||
|
transposition of -2, you use this option to tell
|
||
|
&rosegarden; whether the key of Bb you have entered should
|
||
|
be written as a Bb (concert Ab), or should be transposed
|
||
|
against the segment to result in the trumpet key of C major
|
||
|
(concert Bb).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Scope</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You must choose whether to apply this key signature to
|
||
|
the current segment only, or to all segments, on all
|
||
|
tracks, at this time.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you elect to apply the change to all segments at
|
||
|
this time, the previous key transposition choice will
|
||
|
govern whether all segments receive the specified key,
|
||
|
or a key appropriately transposed segment by segment.
|
||
|
(This is a convenient way to deal with notation for
|
||
|
transposing instruments, because it frees you to think
|
||
|
of all keys in concert pitch, and allow &rosegarden;
|
||
|
to work out what key is used for what transposition.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Existing notes following key change</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You must choose whether any existing notes following
|
||
|
this key change will maintain their current pitches,
|
||
|
maintain their current accidentals in the key, or
|
||
|
whether Rosegarden should make an attempt to transpose
|
||
|
the part into the new key.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Text -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-text">
|
||
|
<title>Text, Lyrics, and LilyPond directives</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A staff can contain various sorts of text, in text
|
||
|
events. There are two basic classes of user-editable text event: single
|
||
|
text items used for point annotations etc., and lyrics, plus a third
|
||
|
type used especially for tweaking LilyPond export. User-editable
|
||
|
types can be created (and so associated with a particular
|
||
|
time in the staff) using the Text tool, which is available on
|
||
|
the
|
||
|
<inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-text-cursor.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
button in the toolbar. Lyrics can
|
||
|
also be created this way, but are more easily created using
|
||
|
the <link linkend="nv-text-lyrics">lyric editor</link>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To add a piece of text, select the Text tool and click
|
||
|
at the point where you want to add it. If you want the text
|
||
|
associated with a particular note or rest, it may be helpful to click
|
||
|
the T cursor directly on that note, so as to ensure proper placement
|
||
|
in time. A dialog box will appear, into which you can type the text
|
||
|
and choose its intended purpose. (Rosegarden prefers to store what
|
||
|
the text is for, rather than how it should look; this is so that in
|
||
|
future we may be able to configure how the various sorts of text are
|
||
|
presented for each individual user.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-textdialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s text dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The available
|
||
|
purposes (or styles) are:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- NOTE: I have removed the "by default" in the following
|
||
|
descriptions. There is no "by default" to this. It does
|
||
|
what it does, and there is no changing it without editing
|
||
|
source code. (dmm) -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Dynamic</term><listitem><para> Used for
|
||
|
minor local indications such as the dynamic marks "p", "mf"
|
||
|
etc. Shown below the staff in small italic
|
||
|
type. </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Direction</term><listitem><para> Used
|
||
|
when indicating significant changes in style or mood. Shown
|
||
|
above the staff in large roman type.
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Local Direction</term><listitem><para>
|
||
|
Used to indicate less significant changes in style or mood.
|
||
|
Shown below the staff in a smaller bold-italic roman
|
||
|
type. </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Tempo</term><listitem><para> Used to
|
||
|
indicate significant changes in tempo. Shown above the
|
||
|
staff in large bold roman type.
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Local Tempo</term><listitem><para> Used
|
||
|
to indicate more minor or local changes in tempo. Shown
|
||
|
above the staff in a small bold roman type.
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Chord</term><listitem><para> Used
|
||
|
to indicate chord changes for guitarists, etc. Shown
|
||
|
above the staff in a small bold roman type.
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Lyric</term><listitem><para> Although
|
||
|
lyrics are usually created in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-text-lyrics">lyric editor</link>, they can also
|
||
|
be entered word by word if necessary using this style. This
|
||
|
style is shown below the text in a small roman typet.
|
||
|
(Warning: if you enter lyrics this way and later
|
||
|
edit the staff's lyrics using the lyric editor, any lyrics
|
||
|
entered this way may be modified or moved if their
|
||
|
positioning is not compatible with that expected by the
|
||
|
lyric editor.) </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>Annotation</term><listitem><para> Used
|
||
|
for helpful text that is not strictly considered part of the
|
||
|
score. Shown below the staff, boxed-out in a yellow
|
||
|
sticky-label-style box. These may not be visible
|
||
|
initially, and can be turned on via
|
||
|
<guimenu>Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show Annotations</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry><term>LilyPond Directive</term><listitem><para> Used
|
||
|
as the mechanism for exporting special tags that are
|
||
|
only understood by the LilyPond exporter. These
|
||
|
provide a means to extend &rosegarden;'s capabilities
|
||
|
beyond what it can do within its own native interface.
|
||
|
Shown above the staff, in a green box. These may not be visible
|
||
|
initially, and can be turned on via
|
||
|
<guimenu>Settings</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Show LilyPond Directives</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For many of the styles, a new combo box will appear that allows
|
||
|
you to select from a variety of commonly-used texts appropriate for
|
||
|
that style, such as "Allegro" and "ritardando." Selecting one of
|
||
|
these texts saves typing, but in no way impedes your ability to type
|
||
|
your own text by hand, should you so desire.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also edit text after creating it, by clicking on
|
||
|
the existing text with the text tool.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-text-lyrics">
|
||
|
<title>Editing lyrics</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The Lyric editor, available from the
|
||
|
<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu lang="en">View</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Open Lyric Editor</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
function, allows you to edit all of
|
||
|
the lyric events for a single staff at once, using a fairly
|
||
|
rudimentary textual editing system. To use it, just
|
||
|
activate the menu option, edit the lyric text in the
|
||
|
resulting dialog, and then hit OK.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The lyrics you enter should follow a particular
|
||
|
format. Bar lines are vital to avoid the editor getting
|
||
|
confused, and are represented with a slash ("/"). Within
|
||
|
each bar the individual syllables are separated by spaces
|
||
|
(at least one space: the editor doesn't care about any extra
|
||
|
whitespace). Each syllable in turn will be attached to the
|
||
|
next subsequent note or chord within that bar (although at
|
||
|
the moment the editor can get quite confused by chords that
|
||
|
are not exact, i.e. that require smoothing or
|
||
|
quantizing).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you want a note to have no syllable attached to it,
|
||
|
you need to provide a dot (".") as the syllable for that
|
||
|
note. (This is why the default lyric text for a segment is
|
||
|
usually full of dots.) Remember to separate the dots with
|
||
|
spaces, so that they are clearly separate syllables.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you want more than one syllable on the same note,
|
||
|
with a space between them, use a tilde ("~") instead of the
|
||
|
space. It will be shown as a space on the score.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you want to split a syllable across two notes, with
|
||
|
a hyphen, you need to enter a space following the hyphen so
|
||
|
the editor knows to treat it as two syllables. (Hyphens get
|
||
|
no special treatment within syllables.)</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Syllables consisting only of numbers surrounded by
|
||
|
square brackets (like "[29]") will be ignored; this is the
|
||
|
format used for the automatically-generated bar numbers
|
||
|
shown in the editor.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You should also be aware that the textual format of
|
||
|
lyrics is only used for editing: the lyrics are actually
|
||
|
stored as distinct text events (one per syllable). This
|
||
|
means that the text format may potentially change in the
|
||
|
future to accommodate more advanced editing capabilities,
|
||
|
although the event format should not change and so your
|
||
|
saved files should continue to be compatible.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; supports also multiple lines of lyrics.
|
||
|
You may always attach one more verse into a single staff
|
||
|
by clicking Add Verse in the lyrics editor. All the verses
|
||
|
are entered with the same syntax. If you leave the last verse
|
||
|
without syllables, or make it empty, it is removed from
|
||
|
the list of verses next time you open the lyrics editor.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-lilypond-directives">
|
||
|
<!-- text has a link here because the reading chain is:
|
||
|
intro -> lilypond directives, which puts you at a point well away
|
||
|
from any explanation of the whole text dialog and whatnot -->
|
||
|
<title>Using special LilyPond directives</title>
|
||
|
<para>LilyPond directives are a special kind of <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-text">text</link> that you can
|
||
|
use to export .ly files that take advantage of
|
||
|
functionality not yet available directly through &rosegarden;'s
|
||
|
own native interface.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Some of these are a bit fiddly with respect to how their
|
||
|
placement in time affects their function. It is not always
|
||
|
immediately apparent at a glance just where they are, or what notes
|
||
|
or barlines they will affect, so I have made placement suggestions
|
||
|
to help ease the process of getting them in the right spot.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
These directives are:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Segno</term><listitem><para>used to export a
|
||
|
<inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-segno.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Coda</term><listitem><para>used to export a
|
||
|
<inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-coda.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
</inlinemediaobject>
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Alt1</term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere in a
|
||
|
measure, designates that the measure(s)
|
||
|
that follow this one should be exported as the
|
||
|
first alternate ending (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-alternative-endings.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Alt2</term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere in a
|
||
|
measure, designates that the measure(s)
|
||
|
that follow this one should be exported as the
|
||
|
second alternate ending (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-alterantive-endings.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>|| -></term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere in a
|
||
|
measure, designates that the next calculated barline will be
|
||
|
rendered as a double barline (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>|. -></term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere in a
|
||
|
measure, designates that the next calculated barline will be
|
||
|
rendered as a terminating barline (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>: -></term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere in a
|
||
|
measure, designates that the next calculated barline will be
|
||
|
rendered as a dashed barline (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Gliss.</term><listitem><para>Placed by clicking
|
||
|
directly on a notehead, draws a glissando between
|
||
|
the target note and the note immediately following (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Arp.</term><listitem><para>Placed by clicking
|
||
|
directly on a chord, draws a wavy line arpeggio
|
||
|
symbol immediately to the left of the affected chord (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Tiny ->.</term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere,
|
||
|
designates that notation immediately following this
|
||
|
directive should be rendered at the "tiny" size (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Small ->.</term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere,
|
||
|
designates that notation immediately following this
|
||
|
directive should be rendered at the "small" size (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Norm. ->.</term><listitem><para>Placed anywhere,
|
||
|
designates that notation immediately following this
|
||
|
directive should be rendered at the normal size;
|
||
|
usually used to cancel a Tiny -> or Small ->. (see file
|
||
|
lilypond-directives.rg for example)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Indications -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-guitarchords">
|
||
|
<title>Guitar Chords</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Like text, it is possible to add guitar chord diagrams to a
|
||
|
notation track (or to edit previously added ones). This is
|
||
|
done by toggling the
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Guitar Chord</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
button, and then clicking on the same area as for adding text.
|
||
|
This will open the Guitar Chord dialog. With it you can select
|
||
|
which guitar chord diagram you want to add from a chord
|
||
|
dictionary which comprises most of the common chord fingerings
|
||
|
by specifying a chord's root and its extension. For
|
||
|
convenience, the fingerings are sorted in three different
|
||
|
categories :
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>beginner</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
,
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>common</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
and
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>all</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
. These categories are actually based on the chord extension
|
||
|
(A7 is a beginner chord, while A13 isn't), not on the
|
||
|
fingering itself, so you can still see "advanced" chord
|
||
|
fingerings listed, even in beginner mode.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-guitarchorddialog.png"
|
||
|
format="PNG" />
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s chord selector dialog
|
||
|
</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
It is also possible to add your own fingerings if needed. To
|
||
|
do this, click on the 'New' button. This will pop up a chord
|
||
|
editor, where you can "draw" which fingering you want to add,
|
||
|
and specify its root, chord extension, and starting fret
|
||
|
number.
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata
|
||
|
fileref="rg-guitarchordeditordialog.png" format="PNG" />
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s chord editor dialog
|
||
|
</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
|
||
|
Note that while you can choose the extension from a list of
|
||
|
predefined values, you can also type whatever value you want.
|
||
|
However, in that case, the new fingering will only be
|
||
|
available in the 'all' list. Also, you can only delete and
|
||
|
edit your own chords. Those from the predefined dictionary
|
||
|
cannot be changed. If you spot a mistake in one of them,
|
||
|
please report it to the development team.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Indications -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-indication">
|
||
|
<title>Slurs and hairpins</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Slur and hairpin (crescendo/decrescendo) dynamic markings are stored as events,
|
||
|
just like notes or rests. To create one, select the area you
|
||
|
want it to cover (a series of notes or whatever), and then use
|
||
|
the <guimenuitem>Add Slur</guimenuitem>,
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Add Crescendo</guimenuitem> or
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Add Decrescendo</guimenuitem> options from
|
||
|
the <guimenu>Phrase</guimenu> menu.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Placement of hairpins can be somewhat tricky, and this is
|
||
|
especially so with haripins that run in line with dynamic markings.
|
||
|
It is commonly the case that a hairpin that doesn't quite look right
|
||
|
in &rosegarden;'s own notation editor will nevertheless come out just
|
||
|
fine once exported to LilyPond. &rosegarden;'s slurs generally come
|
||
|
out best when all the stems are running in the same direction, and
|
||
|
occasionally need to be <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-microposition">repositioned</link> by hand to achieve
|
||
|
better placement. Slurs also tend to fare slightly better once
|
||
|
exported to LilyPond.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You remove a slur or hairpin in the same way as any
|
||
|
other event: either select it with the selection tool and then
|
||
|
hit <keycap>Delete</keycap>, or click on it with the erase tool active.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Stem direction, slashes etc -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-note-qualities">
|
||
|
<title>Note stems and slashes</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can set the stem direction of any selected notes
|
||
|
(provided they are a sort that have stems) using the three
|
||
|
Stem Direction options on the Notes menu. The options allow
|
||
|
you to either fix the stems up or down, or revert to the stem
|
||
|
direction that &rosegarden; would otherwise have chosen. See
|
||
|
also <link linkend="nv-beamed-groups">Beams</link>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The <guimenu>Note</guimenu> menu also contains options for adding slashes
|
||
|
across note stems, for example to indicate short repeated
|
||
|
notes or drum rolls. These are currently purely notational;
|
||
|
&rosegarden; will not take them into account when playing the
|
||
|
staff or generating &MIDI;.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Beamed groups, including overlapping and nesting them -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-beamed-groups">
|
||
|
<title>Beams</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Adding beams to notes is considered a grouping operation
|
||
|
in the &rosegarden; Notation editor, available on the <guimenu>Phrase</guimenu>
|
||
|
menu. Select the notes you want to beam, and use the
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Beam Group</guimenuitem> menu option. To remove a beam, select the notes and use
|
||
|
the <guimenuitem>Unbeam</guimenuitem> menu option.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It is possible to have more than one beamed group
|
||
|
happening at the same time — you just select and beam the
|
||
|
separate groups one at a time — but Rosegarden is usually not
|
||
|
yet clever enough to work out which notes should have stems up
|
||
|
and which should have stems down for simultaneous beamed
|
||
|
groups, so you will probably have to set the stem directions
|
||
|
of the notes in the groups explicitly as well as beaming them.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; can attempt to guess a sensible beaming for a
|
||
|
piece of music, provided it's not too complicated. To invoke
|
||
|
this, select the notes you want to calculate the beaming for
|
||
|
(for example by triple-clicking to select a whole staff) and
|
||
|
then use the <guimenuitem>Auto-Beam</guimenuitem> option on the
|
||
|
<guimenu>Phrase</guimenu> menu. Auto-beaming
|
||
|
is also done automatically when loading a &MIDI; file, for
|
||
|
example, and the editor also does some automatic beaming as
|
||
|
you enter notes (this can be disabled by changing the
|
||
|
"Auto-Beam when appropriate" setting on the configuration
|
||
|
dialog or the insertion tool's right-button menu).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Tuplets -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-tuplets">
|
||
|
<title>Triplets and other tuplets</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>A triplet group consists of three notes or chords played
|
||
|
in the time of two. (More precisely, it consists of notes
|
||
|
with a total duration of three arbitrary units played in the
|
||
|
time of two of those units.)</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>We use the word <quote>tuplet</quote> to describe the general
|
||
|
situation in which notes with a total duration of any given
|
||
|
number of units are played in the time of a different number
|
||
|
of those units: nine notes in the time of eight, or six in the
|
||
|
time of four, or a crotchet and a quaver in the time of a
|
||
|
single crotchet, or even two notes in the time of three. (At
|
||
|
present &rosegarden; does not support the last example — tuplet
|
||
|
groups must always be played with a shorter duration than
|
||
|
written.)</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The triplet and tuplet menu functions work by taking an
|
||
|
existing series of notes or rests and squashing them so they
|
||
|
play quicker, filling in the left-over space at the end of the
|
||
|
series with a final rest and drawing the whole as a tuplet
|
||
|
group. You can therefore create a new series of triplets by
|
||
|
entering the first two notes of the series (in their normal
|
||
|
form), making them into triplets, and then filling in the rest
|
||
|
left over by the triplet operation with the final note of the
|
||
|
triplet. Or you can apply the triplet operation before you
|
||
|
enter any notes, thus turning the original rest itself into
|
||
|
triplet form, and then insert the notes of the triplet on top
|
||
|
of it. Some examples may help:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Need examples and screenshots -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Then discuss general tuplet dialog... -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-tupletdialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s general tuplet dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To specify a general tuplet group, we need to know what
|
||
|
the base note is (for example, if we play three crotchets in
|
||
|
the time of two then the base is a crotchet) and the ratio of
|
||
|
the number of base notes written to the number played.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Then discuss "tuplet mode": with a subtitle? -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Grace notes -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Paste -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-paste-types">
|
||
|
<title>Paste types</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The meaning of <quote>cut and paste</quote> is less obvious for a music
|
||
|
editing program than it is for something like a word
|
||
|
processor in which the letters and words go in a simple
|
||
|
linear order. Accordingly, &rosegarden;'s Notation editor
|
||
|
offers several different types of Paste operation, as well
|
||
|
as separate Cut and Cut and
|
||
|
Close functions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-pastedialog.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s paste-type dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The types of Paste operation are:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Restricted</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Requires an existing gap (containing nothing but
|
||
|
rests) of enough duration to completely contain the
|
||
|
clipboard's contents. The contents are pasted into
|
||
|
the gap. If there is no gap long enough, the paste
|
||
|
is not carried out.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This is the default paste type.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Simple</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Erases enough events to make a gap long enough to
|
||
|
paste into, and then pastes into that. The pasted
|
||
|
events therefore completely replace any existing ones
|
||
|
in the time covered by the paste.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Open and Paste</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The opposite of Cut and
|
||
|
Close. <!-- !!! define that --> Makes room for the paste by moving all of the
|
||
|
subsequent events further towards the end of the
|
||
|
composition.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Note Overlay</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Carries out a paste in the way that it would
|
||
|
happen if you entered each of the notes in the clipboard
|
||
|
yourself using the notation editor: if there are other
|
||
|
notes overlapping with them, the new or existing notes
|
||
|
will be split into ties appropriately.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Matrix Overlay</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Carries out a paste in the way that it would
|
||
|
happen if you entered each of the notes in the clipboard
|
||
|
yourself using the matrix editor: the notes presently
|
||
|
in the way of the paste will be ignored, allowing the new
|
||
|
notes to overlap arbitrarily with them.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>All of these take effect at the current position of the
|
||
|
insert cursor on the current staff. To choose between the various
|
||
|
paste types, use the Paste...
|
||
|
menu option (with dots) on the Edit menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-adjustments">
|
||
|
<title>Adjusting Notation</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-adjustments-note-rest-durations">
|
||
|
<title>Adjusting note and rest durations</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-normalize-rests">
|
||
|
<title>Normalizing rests</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Sometimes as a result of editing or quantization
|
||
|
operations, a piece of notation can end up with incorrect
|
||
|
rest durations for the current time signature. You can use
|
||
|
the <menuchoice><guimenu>Adjust</guimenu><guimenuitem>Rests</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Normalize Rests</guimenuitem></menuchoice> function to
|
||
|
fix these. This examines each sequence of
|
||
|
consecutive rests found in the selection, and adjusts,
|
||
|
splits and merges rests as necessary to ensure that the
|
||
|
rests have theoretically correct durations and fall on the
|
||
|
correct boundaries.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For example, a 4/4 bar containing a crotchet
|
||
|
(quarter-note), then a minim (half-note) rest and a
|
||
|
crotchet rest will be rearranged to place the crotchet
|
||
|
rest first, as the minim rest should not cross the
|
||
|
central beat boundary of the bar.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-make-viable">
|
||
|
<title>Splitting very long notes</title> <para>The
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu>Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Notes</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Tie Notes at
|
||
|
Barlines</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is intended to deal
|
||
|
with notes that have excessively long durations, and
|
||
|
therefore overflow barlines or are too long to be
|
||
|
displayed as a single note. It takes any such notes and
|
||
|
splits them into shorter, tied notes.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-de-counterpoint">
|
||
|
<title>Splitting overlapping notes</title>
|
||
|
<para>The
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu>Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Notes</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Split-and-Tie Overlapping Chords</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> function can be used to turn "counterpoint" notes into a series of split-and-tied notes and chords.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It can be applied to a selection that contains
|
||
|
overlapping notes. It will split overlapping notes at the
|
||
|
point where they overlap, and tie together the resulting
|
||
|
split notes, ensuring that the music takes the form of a
|
||
|
series of chords and/or single notes starting and ending in
|
||
|
neat blocks, with some notes possibly tied.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-rescale">
|
||
|
<title>Rescaling note durations</title>
|
||
|
<para>The
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu>Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Rescale</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Halve
|
||
|
Durations</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> and
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu>Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Rescale</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Double
|
||
|
Durations</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> functions can be
|
||
|
used to perform the most simple rescaling functions.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For more elaborate rescalings, use the
|
||
|
<menuchoice> <guimenu>Adjust</guimenu>
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Rescale</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Stretch
|
||
|
or Squash...</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> function with
|
||
|
which you scale the total lenth of the selection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- need a proper section for this and diatonic transpose
|
||
|
<varlistentry id="nv-transpose">
|
||
|
<title>Transpose</title>
|
||
|
<para><action>Alters the pitch of the selected
|
||
|
notes.</action> This submenu contains basic
|
||
|
transposition functions which move the selected notes
|
||
|
up or down a semitone or a whole octave in pitch, as
|
||
|
well as a general transpose function that allows you
|
||
|
to choose how far up or down you want to transpose the
|
||
|
selection.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>These functions simply change the stored pitches
|
||
|
of the notes in the selection, so that they both play
|
||
|
and appear at the new pitches. They do not deal with
|
||
|
performance transposition (displaying one pitch and
|
||
|
playing another), for which see the main window's
|
||
|
segment parameter box; nor do they help you with
|
||
|
transposing from one key into another, for which see
|
||
|
<link linkend="nv-signatures-key">Key
|
||
|
Signatures</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2>
|
||
|
<title id="nv-microposition">Repositioning notation elements</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You may occasionally wish to to nudge the positioning of some
|
||
|
element of notation that Rosegarden's layout algorithm has not
|
||
|
placed in an optimal location. Use Ctrl-click and drag to move slurs, hairpins,
|
||
|
text events, and several other sorts of events. You may not reposition notes in
|
||
|
this fashion.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-interpret">
|
||
|
<title>Interpreting Performance Cues in Notation</title>
|
||
|
<!-- !!! -->
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can use the Interpret function<menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Adjust</guimenu><guimenuitem>Interpret...</guimenuitem>
|
||
|
</menuchoice>
|
||
|
to modify the velocities and timings of notes according to any
|
||
|
written or indicated dynamics found. The selection of
|
||
|
interpretations available is as follows:
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Apply text dynamics (p, mf, ff etc)
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para> Sets a velocity to each note
|
||
|
based on the last piece of text of "Dynamic"
|
||
|
type seen on the same staff (only texts of the
|
||
|
form pp, p, mp, mf, f, ff, fff, etc., are matched; these are
|
||
|
the texts that are available by default when entering text events
|
||
|
of this style).
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Apply hairpin dynamics
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para> Makes the notes gradually
|
||
|
increase or decrease in velocity during a
|
||
|
crescendo or decrescendo hairpin.
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>
|
||
|
Stress beats
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para> Makes notes that land on bar or
|
||
|
beat boundaries slightly louder (greater
|
||
|
velocity) than the surrounding notes.
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>
|
||
|
Articulate slurs, staccato, tenuto etc
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem><para> Shortens unslurred notes,
|
||
|
shortens staccato notes more, and gives notes
|
||
|
inside slurs and tenuto notes their full length.
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Quantization, smoothing, and display of quantized notes -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-quantization">
|
||
|
<title>Notation from performance data</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; is a multi-purpose program: it is a notation
|
||
|
editor, but it is primarily a sequencer and editor for
|
||
|
performed music. And in performance, of course, the times
|
||
|
and durations of notes are rarely as precise as they are on
|
||
|
a printed score.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This means that it's often desirable for &rosegarden; to do
|
||
|
a lot of tidying of the basic note times and durations when
|
||
|
attempting to make meaningful notes to show in the notation
|
||
|
editor. This is a kind of quantization, but a kind that
|
||
|
requires a surprising amount of guesswork to do well.
|
||
|
&rosegarden; includes a quantizer designed to do a slightly
|
||
|
better job of this than the plain grid quantizer.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Applying
|
||
|
quantization strictly for notation is rather unimaginatively
|
||
|
referred to as <quote>notation quantization</quote>: it only
|
||
|
applies to the notes you see and edit in notation, and
|
||
|
doesn't affect the notes that play, or that you edit in
|
||
|
other views such as the matrix. This quantization is
|
||
|
automatically applied to music imported or recorded from
|
||
|
MIDI, although not all of its possible capabilities are
|
||
|
enabled by default.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
There are two ways to see which notes have been quantized
|
||
|
for notation. By default, each notation view contains a <link
|
||
|
linkend="nv-raw-note-ruler">raw
|
||
|
note ruler</link> (in the group of rulers above the score) showing
|
||
|
a rectangular block for each note. This block is positioned
|
||
|
so as to represent the time and duration of the note as
|
||
|
performed, but with the top and bottom edges of the
|
||
|
rectangle extended or shortened to represent the time after
|
||
|
notation quantization. If this is too much information for
|
||
|
you, you can alternatively choose (in the configuration
|
||
|
dialog) to show in a green colour all note heads in the
|
||
|
score that have had their timings altered by notation
|
||
|
quantization.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-notationquantizer.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s notation quantize dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para><para>
|
||
|
If the quantization &rosegarden; has used is not suitable,
|
||
|
either for the entire score or for a selection of notes, you
|
||
|
can choose to use a different level of quantization or none
|
||
|
at all. To apply a different quantization to some notes,
|
||
|
select the notes and use the Quantize...
|
||
|
menu function (tick the box labelled <quote>Quantize for
|
||
|
notation only</quote>). The quantization level or type used
|
||
|
by default can be changed in the configuration dialog.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="nv-quantization-parameters">
|
||
|
<title>Configurable parameters for the heuristic notation quantizer</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-quantization-parameters-during">
|
||
|
<title>Parameters for quantization itself</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Complexity</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The "complexity" of a notation quantizer is its
|
||
|
most fundamental parameter. A "complex" quantizer
|
||
|
will be more prepared to accept that complex-looking
|
||
|
music is in fact intended to be complex, whereas a
|
||
|
"simple" quantizer is more likely to assume that
|
||
|
complex-looking music results from an imprecise
|
||
|
performance of simple music.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The default setting is intended to produce
|
||
|
reasonable results for a fairly wide range of music.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Base grid unit</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The base grid unit (set to a note duration
|
||
|
value) specifies the absolute minimum unit of note
|
||
|
that will be permitted to remain in the score after
|
||
|
quantization. For example, if set to a semiquaver,
|
||
|
all notes will be placed on boundaries of a multiple
|
||
|
of a semiquaver, with durations also a multiple of a
|
||
|
semiquaver.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The setting of the base grid unit is not quite
|
||
|
as significant for a notation quantizer as it is for a
|
||
|
plain grid quantizer, because all it does is impose an
|
||
|
absolute limit on the level of precision permitted by
|
||
|
the complexity parameter. Mostly, when you find a
|
||
|
case in which increasing the grid unit produces better
|
||
|
results, you've actually found a case in which the
|
||
|
quantizer simply didn't do as good a job as it should
|
||
|
have been able to with the smaller unit.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Tuplet level</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The notation quantizer is capable of identifying
|
||
|
tuplets (triplets and other time-squashed groups),
|
||
|
within reasonable limits. This parameter controls how
|
||
|
ambitious it will attempt to be when looking for
|
||
|
tuplets, by setting a limit on how many notes per
|
||
|
tuplet group it will attempt to identify. If it is
|
||
|
set to <quote>None</quote>, the quantizer will not
|
||
|
attempt to identify tuplets at all.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="nv-quantization-parameters-after">
|
||
|
<title>Parameters that control tidying up after quantization</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Re-beam</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Causes the notes to be re-beamed into groups
|
||
|
appropriately after quantization. This is usually
|
||
|
desirable.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Add articulations (staccato, tenuto,
|
||
|
slurs)</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Causes the quantizer to attempt to identify, based
|
||
|
on the durations of individual and consecutive
|
||
|
notes, which notes should be notated with staccato
|
||
|
marks (for notes that fall significantly short of
|
||
|
the following note, but not apparently short
|
||
|
enough to merit a rest), tenuto (for notes that
|
||
|
almost or just overlap the following note) and
|
||
|
slurs (for series of notes that meet or overlap).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Tie notes at barlines etc</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Causes any notes that are still found after
|
||
|
quantization to overlap barlines or to have
|
||
|
durations not exactly expressible with single note
|
||
|
heads to be split into multiple notes appropriately,
|
||
|
and tied. This has the same effect as applying the
|
||
|
<!-- !!! link --> "Tie Notes at Barlines" function
|
||
|
in the notation view.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This parameter is not set by default because it
|
||
|
changes the number of note events, which is
|
||
|
undesirable when using &rosegarden; partly or
|
||
|
principally as a MIDI sequencer.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>Split-and-tie overlapping chords</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Causes overlapping notes to be split and tied, so
|
||
|
as to make strict chords with individual noteheads
|
||
|
tied as necessary. This has the same effect as
|
||
|
applying the <!-- !!! link --> "Split-and-Tie
|
||
|
Overlapping Chords" function in the notation view.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This parameter is not set by default partly because
|
||
|
it changes the number of note events, which is
|
||
|
undesirable when using &rosegarden; partly or
|
||
|
principally as a MIDI sequencer.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-ornaments">
|
||
|
|
||
|
<title>Playing ornaments</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Rosegarden supports playback of ornaments using its <link
|
||
|
linkend="triggered-segments">triggered segments</link>
|
||
|
mechanism. You can create triggered segments containing any of
|
||
|
the various types of trill or ornament you might want, and
|
||
|
associate them with the notes that want to play them.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To create a new type of ornament, first write out the
|
||
|
notes "in longhand" that you want the ornament to play, and then
|
||
|
select the notes and use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Note</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ornaments</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Make
|
||
|
Ornament...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This cuts the notes to
|
||
|
the clipboard, pastes them into a new triggered segment, and
|
||
|
replaces them with a single note of the same duration that
|
||
|
triggers this segment.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To make a note play an existing ornament, select it and
|
||
|
use <menuchoice>
|
||
|
<guimenu>Note</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ornaments</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Trigger
|
||
|
Ornament...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-useornament.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s Trigger Ornament dialog</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>To edit the notes played in a triggered ornament, you can
|
||
|
double-click on the note that triggers it. This will
|
||
|
change all uses of that ornament, not just the one that you
|
||
|
double-clicked on.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that while Rosegarden can shift triggered segments up
|
||
|
and down in pitch to match their triggering notes, it is not
|
||
|
clever enough to perform transposition into a different
|
||
|
key or scale position.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>See <link linkend="triggered-segments">triggered
|
||
|
segments</link> for more details about ornaments and other uses
|
||
|
of triggered segments.</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-note-styles">
|
||
|
<title>Note styles</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; also allows you to change various aspects of the
|
||
|
way the various types of notes are drawn, such as the choice
|
||
|
of note heads, the number of tails, whether notes are filled
|
||
|
or unfilled and so on.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
A set of standard styles (Classical, Cross, Triangle and
|
||
|
Mensural) is provided, and you can change the style used for
|
||
|
individual notes by selecting them and then using the Note
|
||
|
Style menu options. Each note remembers which
|
||
|
style has been chosen for it, and this information is saved
|
||
|
as part of the composition. You can also change the default
|
||
|
style for new notes using the
|
||
|
<guimenuitem>Configure Rosegarden...</guimenuitem> option in the
|
||
|
<guimenu>Settings</guimenu> menu.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
It is also possible to create your own note styles by
|
||
|
describing them in <acronym>XML</acronym> files. (Even the
|
||
|
standard styles are defined this way: the only reason the
|
||
|
editor knows that a Classical semiquaver has a tilted oval
|
||
|
filled head, a stem, two flags, etc., is that the description
|
||
|
in Classical.xml says so.) See <link
|
||
|
linkend="developers-note-styles">Customising Rosegarden</link>
|
||
|
for more information.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="nv-note-fonts">
|
||
|
<title>Note fonts</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
&rosegarden; is supplied with a single scalable notation
|
||
|
font, the Feta font developed by the LilyPond project. Feta
|
||
|
is an extremely high quality font that should be suitable
|
||
|
for nearly all classical work.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>&rosegarden; also includes support as standard for a
|
||
|
number of other notation fonts. You will need to provide the
|
||
|
fonts themselves in TrueType (.ttf) or PostScript Type-1
|
||
|
(.pfb, .pfa) format, and you will need the relevant
|
||
|
permissions to install them to the same place as &rosegarden;
|
||
|
was installed. To install a supported notation font, locate
|
||
|
the share directory for the &rosegarden; installation (usually
|
||
|
a subdirectory of the KDE desktop installation tree, such as
|
||
|
/opt/kde/share/apps/rosegarden). You will find that this
|
||
|
directory has a subdirectory called "fonts": copy the font
|
||
|
files into there, and restart &rosegarden;. If your font is
|
||
|
supported, it should now appear on the font menu in the
|
||
|
notation editor.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Complete or partial support is currently provided for
|
||
|
the following fonts: Fughetta, by Blake Hodgetts; Petrucci,
|
||
|
the "original" Finale font; Maestro, the "new" Finale font;
|
||
|
Opus, the Sibelius font; Inkpen, the Sibelius jazz font;
|
||
|
Sonata from Adobe; Steinberg, from the Cubase sequencer; and
|
||
|
Xinfonia. (Most of the above font names are registered
|
||
|
trademarks of the respective companies.) THE ROSEGARDEN TEAM
|
||
|
MAKES NO REPRESENTATION AS TO THE LEGAL STATUS OF ANY USE OF
|
||
|
THESE FONTS WITH ROSEGARDEN. It is your responsibility to
|
||
|
ensure you are in compliance with the licence (if any) under
|
||
|
which a font was provided to you, before attempting to use it.
|
||
|
If you are not sure whether you have the right to use a font,
|
||
|
don't: apart from anything else, the standard Feta font is
|
||
|
better than most of these anyway.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It is also possible to provide new mapping files so as
|
||
|
to use new fonts. For some fonts that have similar mappings
|
||
|
or metrics to fonts in the above list, this may be as simple
|
||
|
as editing the name of the font in the mapping file. See
|
||
|
<link linkend="developers-note-fonts">Customising Rosegarden</link>
|
||
|
for more information.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="event-view">
|
||
|
<title>The Event List editor</title>
|
||
|
<sect1 id="ev-introduction">
|
||
|
<title>Introduction</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The &rosegarden; Event List editor shows the events in a
|
||
|
single segment in a raw form, and enables you to edit the
|
||
|
precise properties of those events individually.
|
||
|
|
||
|
<screenshot>
|
||
|
<mediaobject>
|
||
|
<imageobject>
|
||
|
<imagedata fileref="rg-eventlisteditor.png" format="PNG"/>
|
||
|
</imageobject>
|
||
|
<textobject>
|
||
|
<phrase>&rosegarden;'s event list editor</phrase>
|
||
|
</textobject>
|
||
|
</mediaobject>
|
||
|
</screenshot>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
**********************************
|
||
|
|
||
|
PART III:
|
||
|
Technical material
|
||
|
|
||
|
**********************************
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="developers">
|
||
|
<title>Customising Rosegarden</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="developers-note-fonts">
|
||
|
<title>Configuring custom notation fonts</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>If you have a notation font installed on your system in a
|
||
|
scalable format (TrueType or Type-1) but it is not currently
|
||
|
supported by Rosegarden, you can create your own mapping XML
|
||
|
file to describe the font's character map and metrics in a way
|
||
|
Rosegarden can use. These files are installed in the
|
||
|
fonts/mappings subdirectory of the Rosegarden installation
|
||
|
directory, and a number of samples are included with the
|
||
|
distribution.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You can also use these mapping files to define new
|
||
|
pixmap-based fonts, in which every shape in a particular size is
|
||
|
loaded from a separate pixmap file. The two standard notation
|
||
|
fonts supplied with Rosegarden are pixmap fonts defined in
|
||
|
exactly this way.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It is even possible to define a notation font as using one
|
||
|
or more scalable system fonts, augmented with pixmaps for
|
||
|
particular sizes or for characters not found in the scalable
|
||
|
fonts. This is because most of the mapping file format is the
|
||
|
same for scalable and pixmap fonts, and where there are
|
||
|
different elements for the different sorts of fonts, it is
|
||
|
usually possible to include both of them. Rosegarden will
|
||
|
usually use pixmaps where available and scalable fonts
|
||
|
otherwise.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>You may also wish to edit the mapping files supplied with
|
||
|
Rosegarden if you find their measurements for alignment or
|
||
|
sizing are not to your liking. (If you believe that any of the
|
||
|
supplied files are actually wrong, please let us know.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="developers-note-fonts-codes-glyphs">
|
||
|
<title>Codes and Glyphs</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para></para>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format">
|
||
|
<title>Notation font mapping XML format</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Here is a summary of the XML elements that may be used
|
||
|
in the font mapping file.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-encoding">
|
||
|
<title>rosegarden-font-encoding</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>This element must exist in every mapping file, and
|
||
|
should contain all the other elements. The only attribute
|
||
|
is "name", which contains the font's name as shown in the
|
||
|
font selection dropdown. Although the file format will
|
||
|
permit any name to be used here, Rosegarden will only pick
|
||
|
up the font corectly if the XML file has the same name as
|
||
|
the contents of this attribute (except that the XML file
|
||
|
should be named in lower-case and should end in ".xml").
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-information">
|
||
|
<title>font-information</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>This should normally be the first child element of
|
||
|
"rosegarden-font-encoding". It may have any of the
|
||
|
following attributes, all of which are optional:
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>origin</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>A textual description of the likely origin of
|
||
|
the mapped font (not the origin of the mapping
|
||
|
file).</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>copyright</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>A textual description of the likely copyright
|
||
|
status of the mapped font (not the copyright status
|
||
|
of the mapping file). Note that because the mapping
|
||
|
file contains information such as origin and
|
||
|
copyright of the font itself, it is usually
|
||
|
advisable to make separate mapping files for
|
||
|
separate fonts where practical, even if the fonts
|
||
|
share other mapping data.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>mapped-by</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The name of the creator of the mapping file
|
||
|
(i.e. you, presumably).</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>type</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The type of the font. This attribute should
|
||
|
contain one of the values "pixmap" or "scalable".
|
||
|
Fonts that are loaded into the windowing system and
|
||
|
are available to Rosegarden as standard system fonts
|
||
|
have type "scalable"; fonts that need to be loaded
|
||
|
from pixmap files corresponding to individual sizes
|
||
|
of pixmap (such as the feta and rg21 fonts included
|
||
|
with Rosegarden) have type "pixmap".</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>This information is only intended for the user
|
||
|
reference; it isn't actually used by Rosegarden. It is
|
||
|
legitimate in practice for a font to be a mixture of the
|
||
|
two, but in general we will assume in this documentation
|
||
|
that a font is either scalable or pixmap.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>smooth</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>A boolean attribute indicating whether the
|
||
|
font is antialiased (smooth) or not. Should have
|
||
|
the value "true" or "false". If the font is smooth,
|
||
|
other display elements such as beams and slurs that
|
||
|
are not generated from the font will also be
|
||
|
antialiased.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>autocrop</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Only relevant for scalable (system) fonts.
|
||
|
Rosegarden usually expects the metrics for a font to
|
||
|
contain the vertically smallest bounding boxes for
|
||
|
elements such as note heads and accents, rather than
|
||
|
including empty space above or below these elements
|
||
|
for alignment purposes. Most fonts do not do what
|
||
|
Rosegarden expects. Therefore for these fonts you
|
||
|
should set the autocrop attribute to "true"; then
|
||
|
Rosegarden will crop any unnecessary space from the
|
||
|
top and bottom of these elements when rendering
|
||
|
them.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-requirements">
|
||
|
<title>font-requirements</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This element is only relevant for scalable fonts. It is
|
||
|
used to specify that this font should only be offered if
|
||
|
certain system fonts are available, as well as to
|
||
|
associate IDs with those system fonts to refer to in the
|
||
|
<link
|
||
|
linkend="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-symbol-map">font-symbol-map</link>
|
||
|
element. This scheme is used to decide which notation
|
||
|
fonts should be offered to the user, and also allows you
|
||
|
to compose a Rosegarden notation font from more than one
|
||
|
system font if desired.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>The "font-requirements" element should contain a list
|
||
|
of "font-requirement" child elements. Each of these has two
|
||
|
attributes: "font-id", containing a numerical ID of your
|
||
|
choice for reference elsewhere in the file, and either a
|
||
|
"name" or a "names" attribute. If "name" is provided, it
|
||
|
will be used as the name of a single system font to be
|
||
|
associated with the font id; if "names" is provided, it will
|
||
|
be treated as a comma-separated list of system fonts and the
|
||
|
first one found will be associated with the font id.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-sizes">
|
||
|
<title>font-sizes</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The "font-sizes" element specifies which notation font
|
||
|
sizes are available, and how the nominal font size relates
|
||
|
to the dimensions of non-font elements such as stems, staff
|
||
|
lines and beams. The "size" of a notation font is assumed
|
||
|
to be the distance in pixels between staff lines, or more
|
||
|
precisely, the height of a conventional note head that
|
||
|
completely fills the space between lines: the size therefore
|
||
|
does not include the thickness of either of the neighbouring
|
||
|
staff lines.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<!-- !!! TODO throughout this section: how to mark up XML element/attribute names? equiv of <code> in HTML would do -->
|
||
|
There are two possible child elements of "font-sizes":
|
||
|
"font-scale" and "font-size". Their use depends on the
|
||
|
type of font being described.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For pixmap (non-scalable) fonts, the "font-sizes" element
|
||
|
should contain a list of "font-size" elements, one for
|
||
|
each size of pixmaps available. The pixmaps themselves
|
||
|
must be installed in the
|
||
|
fonts/<font-name>/<font-size> subdirectory of
|
||
|
the Rosegarden installation directory, where
|
||
|
<font-name> is the name of the font (as specified in
|
||
|
the "rosegarden-font-encoding" element at the start of the
|
||
|
mapping file), or a lower-case version of the name, and
|
||
|
<font-size> is the pixel size of the font. A font
|
||
|
size will only be made available to the user if it has an
|
||
|
entry in the "font-sizes" list and the pixmap directory is
|
||
|
found.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
For scalable fonts, the "font-sizes" element should
|
||
|
contain one "font-scale" element that defines the
|
||
|
relationships between font and non-font elements in a
|
||
|
general way, and also defines the relationship between
|
||
|
Rosegarden's nominal font size and the size of the
|
||
|
corresponding system font. If this "font-scale" element
|
||
|
is found, then Rosegarden will assume the font is
|
||
|
available in any size. You can however still include one
|
||
|
or more "font-size" elements to define precise proportions
|
||
|
for any particular size for which the general proportions
|
||
|
do not quite work correctly, for example because of
|
||
|
rounding error.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The attributes of "font-scale" and "font-size" are very
|
||
|
similar. The main difference is that all attributes of
|
||
|
"font-scale" are floating-point values relative to the
|
||
|
font size, where 1.0 is the base font size (i.e. the
|
||
|
distance between staff lines), whereas attributes of
|
||
|
"font-size" are integer pixel values. The attributes
|
||
|
available are as follows. (Those marked "optional" have
|
||
|
vaguely sensible defaults, so it's a good idea to try not
|
||
|
setting them first.)
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>note-height</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>This attribute is only available for the
|
||
|
"font-size" element, and it is mandatory in that
|
||
|
element. It defines the base size of font to which the
|
||
|
other attributes in this element apply, and a size that
|
||
|
will be offered to the user and used when looking up
|
||
|
pixmaps for this font.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>font-height</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>May be used in either "font-size" or "font-scale".
|
||
|
This is only relevant for scalable fonts, but is
|
||
|
mandatory for them if used in the "font-scale" element.
|
||
|
This defines the size of the system font used to draw a
|
||
|
given size of notation font.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>beam-thickness</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Defines the thickness of a beam.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>staff-line-thickness</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Defines the thickness of a staff line.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>stem-thickness</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Defines the thickness of a note stem.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>flag-spacing</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Defines the gap between note flags in
|
||
|
cases where multiple flags are drawn by drawing a single
|
||
|
flag several times.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>border-x</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Specifies that the note head pixmaps
|
||
|
have a fixed area to left and right that should not be
|
||
|
considered part of the note head. This attribute gives
|
||
|
the thickness of that area.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>border-y</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Optional. Specifies that the note head pixmaps
|
||
|
have a fixed area to top and bottom that should not be
|
||
|
considered part of the note head. This attribute gives
|
||
|
the thickness of that area.</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-symbol-map">
|
||
|
<title>font-symbol-map</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This element lists the symbols available in this notation
|
||
|
font, and which pixmap files or system font code points
|
||
|
they should be drawn from.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>It should contain a list of "symbol" elements. These
|
||
|
have several possible attributes, the choice of which will
|
||
|
normally depend on whether the font is based on pixmaps or
|
||
|
system fonts:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>name</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Mandatory. This attribute should contain the
|
||
|
name of the notation symbol. If the symbol exists in
|
||
|
the <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U1D100.pdf">Unicode
|
||
|
3.2 standard</ulink>, the name should be that used to
|
||
|
identify the symbol in the standard.</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Most of the symbols Rosegarden expects to find
|
||
|
are in the standard; one exception is that many fonts
|
||
|
have a special version of the flag symbol that is
|
||
|
intended to be used when composing multiple flags from
|
||
|
individual single flags. Rosegarden refers to this as
|
||
|
"MUSICAL SYMBOL COMBINING FLAG-0", a name not used in
|
||
|
the Unicode standard (which has flags 1-5 only).</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>For a definitive set of the symbol names
|
||
|
Rosegarden knows about, see the file
|
||
|
"gui/notecharname.cpp" in the Rosegarden source
|
||
|
distribution. Note however that it is possible to use
|
||
|
additional symbol names by introducing them in a <link
|
||
|
linkend="developers-note-styles">notation
|
||
|
style</link>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>src</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The name of the pixmap file from which this
|
||
|
symbol should be loaded, without a directory or
|
||
|
extension. This is the usual way of describing a
|
||
|
symbol in a pixmap font. The file itself should be
|
||
|
installed to
|
||
|
fonts/<font-name>/<font-size>/<src>.xpm
|
||
|
under the Rosegarden installation directory.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>inversion-src</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The name of a pixmap file from which an inverted
|
||
|
version of this symbol may be loaded, without a
|
||
|
directory or extension. If this attribute is absent
|
||
|
and an inverted version of the symbol is required, it
|
||
|
will be generated simply by loading the normal version
|
||
|
and reflecting it in a central x-axis.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>code</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The code point at which this symbol may be found
|
||
|
in the relevant system font, as a decimal integer.
|
||
|
This is a way of describing a symbol in a scalable
|
||
|
font. This attribute will only be referred to if no
|
||
|
pixmap file is supplied, or if the pixmap file fails
|
||
|
to load.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>inversion-code</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The code point at which an inverted version of
|
||
|
this symbol may be found in the relevant system font.
|
||
|
If this attribute is absent and an inverted version of
|
||
|
the symbol is required, it will be generated simply by
|
||
|
loading the normal version and reflecting it in a
|
||
|
central x-axis.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>glyph</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The raw glyph index at which this symbol may be found
|
||
|
in the relevant system font, as a decimal integer.
|
||
|
This is a way of describing a symbol in a scalable
|
||
|
font. This attribute will only be referred to if no
|
||
|
pixmap file is supplied, or if the pixmap file fails
|
||
|
to load.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>inversion-glyph</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The raw glyph index at which an inverted version of
|
||
|
this symbol may be found in the relevant system font.
|
||
|
If this attribute is absent and an inverted version of
|
||
|
the symbol is required, it will be generated simply by
|
||
|
loading the normal version and reflecting it in a
|
||
|
central x-axis.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>font-id</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>The id of the system font from which this symbol
|
||
|
should be loaded, as defined in the <link
|
||
|
linkend="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-requirements">font-requirements</link>
|
||
|
element. The default is 0.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>codebase</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>This (decimal integer) attribute may be of use
|
||
|
if many of the symbols in a scalable font cover a
|
||
|
short range of code points starting at a relatively
|
||
|
high code page. If supplied, the codebase value will
|
||
|
be added to each of the subsequent code and
|
||
|
inversion-code values when looking up a symbol.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Although none of these attributes is mandatory except for
|
||
|
the name, a symbol obviously needs to supply at least one
|
||
|
of "src", "inversion-src", "code", "inversion-code",
|
||
|
"glyph", or "inversion-glyph" to stand any chance of being
|
||
|
rendered at all. It is of course perfectly legitimate to
|
||
|
supply several or all of these attributes.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-hotspots">
|
||
|
<title>font-hotspots</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect1 id="developers-note-styles">
|
||
|
<title>Creating new notation styles</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Rosegarden's notation editor has the ability to display and
|
||
|
edit notes in various standard styles: classical, diamond
|
||
|
heads and so on. These styles are all defined in XML style
|
||
|
definition files installed along with the application, and
|
||
|
it's possible to create a new one by writing a simple XML
|
||
|
file. Rosegarden simply looks at the set of installed files
|
||
|
to determine which styles to offer the user. You can refer to
|
||
|
the default set of files in the styles subdirectory of the
|
||
|
Rosegarden installation directory for examples.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The file format is not yet especially comprehensive; at the
|
||
|
moment it has been designed to be powerful enough to describe
|
||
|
the standard styles that come with Rosegarden, but not much
|
||
|
more. If you should try to create new styles this way, we'd
|
||
|
be very interested in your feedback on the Rosegarden
|
||
|
mailing-lists.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect2 id="developers-note-styles-format">
|
||
|
<title>Notation style XML format</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Here is a summary of the XML elements that may be used in
|
||
|
a style definition file.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-styles-note-style">
|
||
|
<title>rosegarden-note-style</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>This element must exist in every style file, and
|
||
|
should contain all the other elements. It has one optional
|
||
|
attribute, "base-style", which may be used to name a style
|
||
|
from which this style takes the default values for any
|
||
|
parameters not specified elsewhere in the present file.
|
||
|
It's often good practice to define a style in terms of the
|
||
|
minimal difference from a given base style: see the supplied
|
||
|
Cross.xml for a particularly simple example.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Note that the "rosegarden-note-style" element does not
|
||
|
give the name of the style being defined, which is instead
|
||
|
currently drawn from the name of the file. At some point in
|
||
|
the future we may add internationalizable style name
|
||
|
attributes to this element.</para>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<sect3 id="developers-note-styles-global-note">
|
||
|
<title>global, note</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>Within the "rosegarden-note-style" element, there may
|
||
|
be one "global" element and any number of "note" elements.
|
||
|
We describe these together, as they have almost identical
|
||
|
sets of attributes. The "global" element simply provides
|
||
|
default values for those parameters not specified for a
|
||
|
particular note type in any following "note" element.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>The attributes for these elements are as follows. All
|
||
|
of these are optional except as described:</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>type</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Only relevant to the "note" element, and
|
||
|
mandatory for that element. This attribute specifies
|
||
|
which sort of note is being styled. Legal values are
|
||
|
textual American or British note names (from "64th",
|
||
|
"sixth-fourth note", "hemidemisemiquaver" etc to
|
||
|
"double whole note").
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>shape</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Defines a note head shape for this style. Any
|
||
|
string is a legal value, but the only values
|
||
|
implemented so far are "angled oval", "level oval",
|
||
|
"breve", "cross", "triangle up", "triangle down",
|
||
|
"diamond" and "rectangle". The value "number" is also
|
||
|
recognised but not yet implemented.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>charname</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Defines a note font character name to be used as
|
||
|
the note head for this style. An element may supply a
|
||
|
"shape" or "charname" attribute, but not both. The
|
||
|
name should be one of those defined in the current
|
||
|
notation font's <link
|
||
|
linkend="developers-note-fonts-mapping-format-font-symbol-map">symbol
|
||
|
map</link> (in a "name" attribute).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>filled</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Specifies whether this note should have a filled
|
||
|
head (where applicable, i.e. where the shape attribute
|
||
|
supplies a shape that is available both filled and
|
||
|
unfilled). Must be "true" or "false".
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>stem</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Specifies whether this note should have a stem.
|
||
|
Must be "true" or "false".
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>flags</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Defines how many flags or beams this note should
|
||
|
have. The valid range is 0 to 4.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>slashes</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Defines how many slashes this note should have
|
||
|
across its stem.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>hfixpoint</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Specifies in which x position the stem fixes to
|
||
|
the note head. Acceptable values are "normal" (the
|
||
|
right side when the stem points up, the left when it
|
||
|
points down), "central", and "reversed" (left side
|
||
|
when the stem points up, right when it points down).
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>vfixpoint</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Specifies in which y position the stem fixes to
|
||
|
the note head. Acceptable values are "near" (the stem
|
||
|
fixes to the top when pointing up, the bottom when
|
||
|
pointing down), "middle", or "far".
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</sect3>
|
||
|
</sect2>
|
||
|
</sect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- (OPTIONAL) A Programming/Scripting reference chapter should be
|
||
|
used for apps that use plugins or that provide their own scripting hooks
|
||
|
and/or development libraries. -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- cc: I think we should document the DCOP API here, but I don't
|
||
|
think we should include extensive developer docs, although we should
|
||
|
point to where they can be found in the source tree or online. -->
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Programming <application>Rosegarden</application> plugins is
|
||
|
a joy to behold. Just read through the next
|
||
|
66 pages of <acronym>API</acronym>'s to learn how!
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
<!-- Use refentries to describe APIs. Refentries are fairly
|
||
|
complicated and you should consult the docbook reference for
|
||
|
further details. The example below was taken from that reference
|
||
|
and shortened a bit for readability. -->
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
<refentry id="re-1007-unmanagechildren-1">
|
||
|
<refmeta>
|
||
|
<refentrytitle>XtUnmanageChildren</refentrytitle>
|
||
|
<refmiscinfo>Xt – Geometry Management</refmiscinfo>
|
||
|
</refmeta>
|
||
|
<refnamediv>
|
||
|
<refname>XtUnmanageChildren
|
||
|
</refname>
|
||
|
<refpurpose>remove a list of children from a parent widget's managed list.
|
||
|
</refpurpose>
|
||
|
</refnamediv>
|
||
|
<refsynopsisdiv>
|
||
|
<refsynopsisdivinfo>
|
||
|
<date>4 March 1996</date>
|
||
|
</refsynopsisdivinfo>
|
||
|
<synopsis>
|
||
|
void XtUnmanageChildren(<replaceable>children</replaceable>, <replaceable>num_children</replaceable>)
|
||
|
WidgetList <replaceable>children</replaceable>;
|
||
|
Cardinal <replaceable>num_children</replaceable>;
|
||
|
</synopsis>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<refsect2 id="r2-1007-unmanagechildren-1">
|
||
|
<title>Inputs</title>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term><replaceable>children</replaceable>
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Specifies an array of child widgets. Each child must be of
|
||
|
class RectObj or any subclass thereof.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term><replaceable>num_children</replaceable>
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Specifies the number of elements in <replaceable>children</replaceable>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
</refsect2></refsynopsisdiv>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<refsect1 id="r1-1007-unmanagechildren-1">
|
||
|
<title>Description
|
||
|
</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<function>XtUnmanageChildren()</function> unmaps the specified widgets
|
||
|
and removes them from their parent's geometry management.
|
||
|
The widgets will disappear from the screen, and (depending
|
||
|
on its parent) may no longer have screen space allocated for
|
||
|
them.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>Each of the widgets in the <replaceable>children</replaceable> array must have
|
||
|
the same parent.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>See the “Algorithm” section below for full details of the
|
||
|
widget unmanagement procedure.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</refsect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<refsect1 id="r1-1007-unmanagechildren-2">
|
||
|
<title>Usage</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Unmanaging widgets is the usual method for temporarily
|
||
|
making them invisible. They can be re-managed with
|
||
|
<function>XtManageChildren()</function>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
You can unmap a widget, but leave it under geometry
|
||
|
management by calling <function>XtUnmapWidget()</function>. You can
|
||
|
destroy a widget's window without destroying the widget by
|
||
|
calling <function>XtUnrealizeWidget()</function>. You can destroy a
|
||
|
widget completely with <function>XtDestroyWidget()</function>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
If you are only going to unmanage a single widget, it is
|
||
|
more convenient to call <function>XtUnmanageChild()</function>. It is
|
||
|
often more convenient to call <function>XtUnmanageChild()</function>
|
||
|
several times than it is to declare and initialize an array
|
||
|
of widgets to pass to <function>XtUnmanageChildren()</function>. Calling
|
||
|
<function>XtUnmanageChildren()</function> is more efficient, however,
|
||
|
because it only calls the parent's <function>change_managed()</function>
|
||
|
method once.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</refsect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<refsect1 id="r1-1007-unmanagechildren-3">
|
||
|
<title>Algorithm
|
||
|
</title>
|
||
|
<para><function>XtUnmanageChildren()</function> performs the following:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<variablelist>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>-
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Ignores the child if it already is unmanaged or is being
|
||
|
destroyed.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
<varlistentry>
|
||
|
<term>-
|
||
|
</term>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Otherwise, if the child is realized, it makes it nonvisible
|
||
|
by unmapping it.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
</variablelist>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</refsect1>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<refsect1 id="r1-1007-unmanagechildren-4">
|
||
|
<title>Structures</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
The <type>WidgetList</type> type is simply an array of widgets:
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<screen id="sc-1007-unmanagechildren-1">
|
||
|
typedef Widget *WidgetList;
|
||
|
</screen>
|
||
|
</refsect1>
|
||
|
</refentry>
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="credits">
|
||
|
|
||
|
<title>Credits and License</title>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<application>Rosegarden</application>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
Rosegarden is Copyright 2000-2008 Guillaume Laurent,
|
||
|
Chris Cannam and Richard Bown. The moral rights of
|
||
|
Guillaume Laurent, Chris Cannam and Richard Bown to be
|
||
|
identified as the authors of this work have been asserted.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
Parts of Rosegarden are derived from X11 Rosegarden 2.1,
|
||
|
which is Copyright 1994 – 2001 Chris Cannam, Andrew Green,
|
||
|
Richard Bown and Guillaume Laurent.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
For musical notation display Rosegarden uses pixmaps
|
||
|
derived from the Feta font, part of the <ulink
|
||
|
url="http://lilypond.org/">LilyPond</ulink> software,
|
||
|
which is Copyright 1997 – 2001 Jan Nieuwenhuizen and
|
||
|
Han-Wen Nienhuys.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
Other major contributors include Randall Farmer, Ron
|
||
|
Kuris, Hans Kieserman, Michael McIntyre, and Pedro
|
||
|
Lopez-Cabanillas.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
The Rosegarden splash-screen image is Copyright 2006 Carolyn H. McIntyre,
|
||
|
used by permission.
|
||
|
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Documentation copyright 2002-2006 Chris Cannam, Richard Bown, Guillaume Laurent
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
<!--
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
Translations done by:
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem>
|
||
|
<para>Babel D. Fish <email>babelfish@kde.org</email> (Sanskrit)</para>
|
||
|
</listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
-->
|
||
|
<!-- For URL links to common stuff like the one below,
|
||
|
always use paths like "common/gpl-licence".
|
||
|
In this path, "common" will be a symbolic link built at "make install" time.
|
||
|
This link will normally point to $KDEDIR/share/doc/HTML/en/common,
|
||
|
where "en" should be replaced with the current language. -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
This program is licensed under the terms of the
|
||
|
<ulink url="common/gpl-license.html">GNU General Public License</ulink>.
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
<!-- Note that the revhistory tags apply to the documentation
|
||
|
version and not to the app version. That is why we use an
|
||
|
ItemizedList instead for this list of revisions to the app. -->
|
||
|
|
||
|
<chapter id="rosegarden-revhistory">
|
||
|
<title>Rosegarden Revision History</title>
|
||
|
<para>
|
||
|
<itemizedlist>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.7.0 – May 2008: notation track headers, nested brackets in
|
||
|
LilyPond export, grace notes finally functional, quick playback
|
||
|
position marker, ties can be flipped, variable-height tracks allow
|
||
|
access to all previously overlapping segments, take track
|
||
|
transpose into account while recording, convert existing segments
|
||
|
when loading an instrument preset, etc., bug fixes galore
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.6.0 – November 2007: fretboards, diatonic transpose, multiple lines of lyrics, marker ruler improvements, overlapping notes visibility, LilyPond export enhancements and new dialog, better infrared remote control support, better configuration dialog, fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.5.1 – March 2007: bug fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.5 – February 2007: audio timestretching and input format conversion, matrix usability improvements, tempo tapping, context help, some features, code reorganisation and new build system (again)
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.4 – September 2006: LilyPond export vastly improved,
|
||
|
exportable LilyPond directives, cut/copy/paste by ranges that
|
||
|
include tempo and time data, tempo entry and manipulation vastly
|
||
|
improved, multi-track MIDI recording, MIDI recording filters,
|
||
|
track paramter box, create segments using preset parameters from
|
||
|
a database of over 300 real-world instruments, texts like
|
||
|
"Allegro" offered as a parallel alternative to typing, LilyPond
|
||
|
preview, assorted smaller features, many bug fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.2.4 – July 2006: bug fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.2.3 – February 2006: new segment canvas, percussion matrix, multi-track audio recording, project packager, external MIDI controllers, MTC sync, proper ALSA MIDI ports, new icons, new build system
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
1.0 – February 2005: many fixes, DSSI effects, latency compensation
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.9 – July 2004: plugin synths, triggered segments, notation improvements
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.8 – May 2004: better audio subsystem
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.7 – February 2004:
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.6 – December 2003: bug fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.5 – November 2003: a great lot of stuff
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9.1 – May 2003: step recording, Mup export, many many bug fixes
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.9 – April 2003: many notation improvements, improved bank editor, audio enhancements and refinements, translations
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.8.5 – December 2002: bank editor, MIDI filters, panic button
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.8 – October 2002: printing, LADSPA plugins, improved Matrix View
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.2.0 – August 2002: WAV file support, sweep selections, contrapuntal staves
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.6 – June 2002: configuration dialog, LilyPond support, quantize dialog
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.5 – May 2002: KDE 3, ALSA support, JACK audio support
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.4 – March 2002: more undo, segment editing, audio playback
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.3 – January 2002: piano-roll/matrix view, &MIDI; recording
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.2 – November 2001: notation undo, transport dialog, position pointer
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1.1 – October 2001: scalable notation
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
<listitem><para>
|
||
|
0.1 – June 2001: first public release of Rosegarden-4
|
||
|
</para></listitem>
|
||
|
</itemizedlist>
|
||
|
</para>
|
||
|
</chapter>
|
||
|
|
||
|
&documentation.index;
|
||
|
</book>
|